Home

1 - Silberauto

1. 192 BU PUM MURS Sais 8 Hill Descent Control Indicator 122 175 Gasoline 190 Driving Through Flowing Rising Or Hill Start Assist Ew d Get bee elfe Weise 173 Gauge deae ute dede Dai a 119 Shallow Standing Water 165 Holder COM 4er ae de 109 Octane Rating 190 239 Hazard Warning Flasher 204 Holder Cup oec s croca a tuaia 108 Requirements 190 238 Head Restraints 80 Hood Release co ese ds omes 87 Tank Capacity 238 Head Rests 80 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid 226 PISIS ee Pi 23 Headlight xem e ge 87 88 AUTOMATICO s so ei ae aeter Se ww RA 88 CUIDA Se cx are ete a kee at ou E ice A 12 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 192 193 215 Bulb Replacement 236 Key es dias Guo BUS E RACES S 12 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 119 Clean ute Reed ep X 231 gnition Key Removal 12 Gasoline Clean Air 191 Delay ar ia oS mob A 89 lluminated Entry 17 Gasoline Fuel 190 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 90 mmobilizer Sentry Key 13 16 Leveling 0 o o 89 nfant Restraint 42 43 nflation Pressure Tires 119 179 nformation Center Vehicle 128 nside Rearview Mirror 57 nstrument Cluster 118 119 nstrument Panel and Controls 117 nstrument Panel Cover 230 nstrument Pane
2. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death 182 Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gaso line Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be in spected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tires The ser vice description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may ad versely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability WARNING e Do not use a tire
3. 226 Engine Olll e xam aaa bee as 216 Manual Transmission 226 Power Steering 168 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 239 Fog Light Service 237 FOGIEIGHIS suec ee xs 87 89 127 237 Folding RearSeat 83 Four Wheel Drive Gauges Lights On Reminder 89 Sd aco ace eR RIA a ak 162 163 Coolant Temperature 124 On With Wipers 88 93 SYSTEMS noe ae ee ae eae ee t 162 FUEL o usce Baars Pa we Ae He 119 PASSING lu very Behe E ace ques 90 Four Wheel Drive Operation 162 Odometer 125 Replacing uu edi Gow Rm edes 236 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral Speedometer 121 SWIECI sg wg ace doe da 87 88 Nii oo oe E 200 Tachometer 2x een ems 122 Time Delay zu be xx 89 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral Gear Ranges 155 157 160 Heated Mirrors llle 58 N mo eudemudger eese gel 200 General Information 14 19 Heated Seats 82 Front Axle Differential 227 Glass Cleaning 231 Heater s scene Meee oe ux 138 Fuel seas Ba ee as Ree ee eee 190 Gross Axle Weight Rating 193 High Beam Indicator 121 AQUI VES sss ooo ma E E 191 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 193 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer DIESEL C 192 SWILCR iud Rue ra pERGS 90 Ethanol 4 4 0 a7 34 4 urna Re mae 190 E Hill Descent Control 175 Filler Cap Gas Cap
4. CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could dam age the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat Feature To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room NOTE Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to position the front seat to its mid track position Also be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly To Lower the Rear Seat 1 Locate the release strap on the lower out board side of each rear seatback 2 Pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle 81c7c9c9 Rear Seat Release Strap 3 Fold the rear seat completely forward 4 If desired push down on the seatback to lock it in the folded position To Raise the Rear Seat NOTE If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the sea
5. WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you uncon scious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area f it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the und
6. OWNER REGISTRATION CERTIFICATE Selling Dealer OWNER Stamp ADDRESS Selling Dealer Signature vnl METAM NI Telephone Number Private Make Business Model have provided and explained the following Day pare oF Ree LL JL 1 LL Registration No or License No OPERATING MANUAL Vehicle Handbook VEHICLE PRE DELIVERY INSPECTION CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DEALER SIGNATURE TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION 2d aia e O R E clea dele remus ia de ir a repas 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 0 0 0c e cece hn hrs 9 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 0 00 ccc eee e cece eee eee nnn 51 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL leen hh nnns 115 5 STARTING AND OPERATING o on onunu e e e er v na rrr rrr iral 147 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 424 922 Apc es need rana A a 203 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 05 050 ci an eo m Seas exh a e rd RACRR cen S R 211 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES i a cyezzs ee mex a da e ex wer RR RR E a 241 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 das da uae dace iru ana s a og rats x a et he Ru a Rd a UR IHR C wie 265 10 I2dguc P A 277 INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it repre sents precision workmanship distinctiv
7. 75 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Loocoobo0locolgccoOOCU Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires Replace the engine air filter element Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the manual transmission fluid add if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Replace the accessory drive belt Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 87 500 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t J Rotate tires Replace the engine air filter element J Drain the fuel filter water separator unit J Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 261 100 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tire
8. Voice Commands Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s zero download pager beeper one Dutch Nederlands pair a phone two edit phone pairing pairing three emergency phonebook phonebook four English previous five delete all erase all redial six Espanol select phone select seven Francais send eight German Deutsch set up phone settings or nine help phone set up asterisk star home transfer call plus Italian Italiano uconnect Tutorial hash language try again all all of them list names voice training system training Breakdown service list phones work call main menu return to main menu yes cancel mobile confirmation prompts confirmation mute on continue mute off delete new entry dial no 75 VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition VR System Operation e This Voice Recognition system al lows you to control your AM FM radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local la
9. ECO uS Fuel Saver Indicator Off ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator On e AAA a ET Door Ajar GATE oleada seeks Liftgate Ajar gLASS Flipper Glass Ajar gASCAP Fuel Cap Fault noFUSE Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instru ment Cluster this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this section for more information ECO ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to in crease fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Press the Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display gASCAP Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the words gASCAP will display in the odometer display area If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem continues the mes sage will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly ins
10. For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 sec onds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is program mable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle dur ing auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the ob stacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function un expectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manu ally WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Window Lockout Button The window lockout button on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window control on the other
11. Over 40 auto manufacturer s world wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the Worldwide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufac turer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are avail able Methanol Methyl or Wood Alcohol is used in a variety of concentrations when blended with unleaded gasoline You may find more methanol along wi cosolvents Problems methanol gasoline or E fuels containing 3 or h other alcohols called hat result from using 85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While TBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the nega ive effects of methanol CAUTION or E85 ethanol Use DO NOT use gasolines containing methanol result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components of these blends may Ethanol The manufacturer recommends that your ve hicle be operated on fuel containing no more than 10 ethanol Purchasing your fuel from a reputable supplier may reduce the risk of ex ceeding this 10 limit and or of receiving fue with abnormal properties It should also be noted that an increase in fuel consumption should be expected when using ethanol blended fuels due to the lower energy conten of ethanol Problems that result from u
12. phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the te button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted say List Phones e The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the we button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the TM button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the uconn
13. Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section for more information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS comple ments the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deacti vated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by mo
14. Replace the engine air filter element Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Inspect the CV joints Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 264 WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only that service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic nspection and service should be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or sus pected Retain all receipts 266 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer distributors are vitally inter ested in your satisfaction with their products and services If a servicing problem or other difficulty should occur we recommend that you take the following steps Discuss the problem at the authorized dealer with the dealer principal or the service man ager Management personnel at the authorized dealer are in the best position to resolve the problem quickly When you
15. e The transfer case will not shift NOTE The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the electric shift four wheel drive system If this light remains on after engine start up or it illuminates during driving it means that the four wheel drive system is not function ing properly and that service is required Shifting Procedures NOTE If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met the transfer case will not shift the indicator light for the previous position will remain on and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the re quirements for the selected position have been met To retry a shift move the transfer case switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again 2WD to 4WD Auto Move the transfer case switch to the desired position Shifts between 2WD and 4WD Auto can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is stopped the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either OFF or RUNNING This shift can not be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position 2WD or 4WD Auto to 4WD Low When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or its occupants Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h using
16. phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound com manas can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice com mand is given You can also break the com mands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speak ing to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The uconnect phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the uconnect phone from idle simply press the button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the to button on the radio control head Cancel Comma
17. 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Fill Below Engine Cover 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 9 Air Cleaner Filter 070606664 214 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This System monitors the performance of the emis Sions engine and automatic transmission con trol systems When these systems are operat ing properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current govern ment regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnos tic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for Service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission con trol system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed e f the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message f the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or d
18. Aas turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and it may stay on for approximately three seconds If the light remains on or turns on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that ser vice is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally provided the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Brakes The ABS Warning light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the vehicle The light should turn on If the light does not turn on have the system checked by an authorized dealer 122 15 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelera tor to prevent engine damage 16 4 LOW Mode Indicator If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the 4 vehicle is in the 4WD LOW mode LOW In this mode the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft are mechani cally locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 17 Hill Descent Control Indicator If Equipped The symbol indicates the status of af the Hill Decent Control HDC fea e ture The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be
19. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent add as required Once a Month e Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the engine coolant antifreeze deaeration bottle and brake mas ter cylinder add as needed 255 e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the exhaust system e Inspect brake hoses e Check the engine coolant antifreeze level hoses and clamps e Inspect engine accessory drive belts Re place as necessary e Inspect for the presence of water in the fuel filter water separator unit Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 12 500 miles 20 000 km or 12 months whichever comes first 256 12 500 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule a a a a a a Loo Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires Replace the engine air filter element Drain the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 500 miles 20 000 km or 12
20. Cellular 59 Phone Hands Free uconnect 59 Polishing and Waxing 229 Power Door Locks x oa geh 20 MINOIS es eT US wah eh 58 SEAS 4 Puce del ae wae Ala Sane a Sie 80 Steering 05 168 SU a sin oo oe eed keen x 103 Sunroof Sky Slider 104 227 Windows 00 23 Power Steering Fluid 240 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 34 Preparation for Jacking 206 Pretensioners Seat Belts 0 0 0 30 Programmable Electronic Features 134 Radial Ply Tires 180 Radio Remote Controls 136 Radio Sound Systems 136 Rain Sensitive Wiper System 93 Rear Axle Differentia 227 Rear Park Sense System 97 Rear Seat Folding 83 Rear Window Defroster 113 Rear Window Features 112 Rear Wiper Washer 112 Rearview Mirrors 0 0 57 Reclining Front Seats 79 Recreational Towing 200 Refrigerant cde Ga wee Erud 219 Release Hood oo oia osos or 87 Reminder Lights On 89 Reminder Seat Belt 32 Remote Control Security Alarm 0 15 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 17 Remote Sound System Radio Controls oa ea em RR mds 136 Repeater Lights Side 237 Replacement Bulbs 235 Replacement Keys 0 14 Replacement Parts
21. Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 245 37 500 Miles 60 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t J Rotate tires 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary 45 000 Miles 72 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 1 Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 2 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 52 500 Miles 84 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 246 60 000 Miles 96 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OOC OO C O C Lc Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter R
22. J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 105 000 miles 168 000 km Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 248 82 500 Miles 132 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter jj 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 249 OOC OO C O C O O O C 90 000 Miles 144 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tf Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during
23. Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone num ber for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home 63 number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit fea ture NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the 4 button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you en
24. continuous tone Also the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem bly depending on its size and shape giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console Power Sunroof Switch WARNING e Never leave unattended children in a ve hicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended chil dren can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in se rious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued e In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt prop erly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too e Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To o
25. entering the valve stem which could dam age the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace nor mal tire care and maintenance or to pro vide warning of a tire failure or condition e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev 185 els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following compo
26. once you turn ParkSense off it remains off until you turn it on again even if you cycle the ignition key When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off the instrument cluster will dis play PARK ASSIST DISABLED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE ParkSense when on will MUTE the radio when it is sounding a tone If a ParkSense system malfunction oc curs a single chime will sound once per ignition cycle In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will dis play SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM and the LED in the ParkSense switch will illuminate If this occurs after making sure the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruc tion see your authorized dealer for ser vice Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly taking care not to scratch or damage them The sensors must not be covered with ice snow slush mud dirt or debris Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle be hind the fascia bumper or it could pro vide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia bumper Objects must not be within 12 in 30 cm from the rear fascia bumper while driving the vehicle Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem causing the SER VICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message to be dis
27. or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill You or others could be injured if you leave the a A dd ce ue vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should NOTE always be applied when the driver is not in the During cold weather you may experience vehicle especially on an incline increased effort in shifting until the trans 2 4 6 R 154 mission fluid warms up This is normal 81cd6226 Shift Pattern Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal You should always use first gear when starting from a standing position if under heavy load or when pulling a trailer Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently or both fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart Shift at the vehicle speeds isted for acceleration When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift speeds may not apply Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H En 1to0 2to 3to 4 to 5to 3 7L Accel 15 24 34 47 56 Cruise 10 19 27 37 41 2 8 Accel 15 24 34 47 56 Liter 24 39 55 76 90 Die sel Cruise 10 19 27 37 41 Downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when
28. par ticularly unattended children can become entrapped by the Sky Slider while oper ating the Sky Slider switch Such entrap ment may result in serious injury or death 105 Sky Slider Control The Sky Slider switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console 034305976 Sky Slider Switch NOTE The Sky Slider switch will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or ACC position 106 Opening the Sky Slider Using Automatic Mode Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second and the Sky Slider will open from the front and move automatically toward the rear of the vehicle Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the Sky Slider will open from the rear and move automatically toward the front of the vehicle NOTE e During operation any movement of the Sky Slider switch will stop the Sky Slider roof e To resume the operation from a partially open position press and release the switch a second time e The Sky Slider will not open from the front and the rear at the same time The Sky Slider must close fully before open ing it from the opposite end Using Operator Mode Press the switch rearward and hold it the Sky Slider will open from the front and move toward the rear of the vehicle Press the switch forward and hold it the Sky Slider will open from the rear and move toward t
29. people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly e Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is danger ous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Continued 27 WARNING Continued e Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap 28 Latch Plate 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latc
30. sure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury Towing with HSA HSA will provide assistance during accelera tion on an incline while towing a trailer 174 WARNING e Ifyou use a trailer brake controller with your trailer the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released In order to avoid rolling down an incline while re suming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal e HSA is not a parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle Also be certain to leave an auto matic transmission in PARK or a manual transmission in REVERSE or 1st gear e Failure to follow these warnings can result in an accident or serious personal injury Disabling And Enabling HSA This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Hill Start Assist under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle
31. the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be estab lished Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease for gas and diesel engines Each time the lever is tapped Speed decreases To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system main tains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system pro vides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and the de tected obstacle when ba
32. then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product 240 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Maintenance Schedule Gasoline Engine NOTE Proper operation of four wheel drive ve hicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any dif ference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case The tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched uled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Re quired will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary 242 On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary The oil change indicator message will illumi nate approximately 7 000 miles 11 200 km after the most recent oil change was per formed Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within 500 miles 800 km However an earlier oil change at 3 000 miles 5 000 km may be required if the vehicle is operated under Severe Duty Conditions later in this section NOTE e The oil change indic
33. there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat 46 i Tether Strap Routing Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attach ment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchor age bars pushing aside the seat cover mate rial Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant o
34. wr e o GG xy i A amp sQ A n GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG SUDING DOOR EMERGENCY LIGHTER ANO TETHER FOR UCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW SRS Y C E S88 75 d o m sn B MERE QM SERGE SERRATE BERSE Rue oa OS O RST codes E CONTROL OFF 010507683 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could re sult in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss impor tant information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield The stamped VIN is located on the right front door sill under the sill moulding Vehicle Identification Number VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death 10 e OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS COUETTE TR 26 e Lap Shoulder Belts oia as eet ie es et pw teins 27 e Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 30 e Seat Belt Pretensioner If Equipped 30 e Supplemental R
35. 00 Fax 351 0 21 323 91 99 272 PUERTO RICO AND U S VIRGIN ISLANDS Chrysler International Services S A P O Box 191857 San Juan 009191857 Tel 7877825757 Fax 7877823345 ROMANIA S C Auto Rom S R L Bucuresti Bd Expozitiei nr 2 RO 78334 Tel 01 2240020 25 Fax 01 2241638 RUSSIA Chrysler RUS SAO 39A Leningradsky prospect 125167 Moscow Tel 7 495 745 2600 Fax 7 495 745 2601 SLOVENIA Chrysler Jeep Import d d Leskoskova 2 1122 Ljubljana Tel 01 5843 138 Fax 01 5843 222 SPAIN Chrysler Espa a S L Dpto De Atenci n al Cliente Chrysler Jeep y Dodge Apdo De Correos 24 19200 Azuqueca de Henares Guadalajara Tel 902 888 782 Fax 913 496 529 SWEDEN Chrysler Sverige Bronsyxegatan 14 Box 50530 S 202 50 Malm Tel 46 0 8 752 9858 Fax 46 0 8 752 6483 SWITZERLAND Chrysler Switzerland GmbH Bernstrasse 55 CH 8952 Schlieren Tel e German 0800 80 29 20 e French 0800 80 29 21 e Italian 0800 80 29 22 Telefax 41 0 44 755 64 00 TAIWAN Chrysler Taiwan Co LTD 13th Floor Union Enterprise Plaza 1109 Min Sheng East Road Section 3 Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 080081581 Fax 886225471871 TURKEY Chrysler Jeep Tic A S TEM Otoyolu Hadimkoy Cikisi 34900 Buyukcekmece Istanbul Tel 90 212 867 40 00 Fax 90 212 867 44 63 UKRAINE JSC AutoCapital Velyka Vasylkivska str 15 01004 Kyiv Tel 38 044 206 8888 Fax 38 044 206 8
36. 15 7 in 40 cm 2 Flashing Fast Tone Warning Object Detected 11 8 in 30 cm 11 8 in 30 cm 1 Flashing Continuous Tone NOTE When the ParkSense switch is The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense will MUTE the radio if on when Py pressed to disable the system the ParkSense is disabled or defective The Park the system is sounding an audio tone Enabling and Disabling ParkSense ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with a switch located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or through the Customer Programmable Features section of the EVIC The available choices are OFF Sound Only or Sound and Display For details refer to Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 100 instrument cluster will display the PARK ASSIST DISABLED mes sage for approximately five sec onds Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system is dis abled the EVIC will display the PARK ASSIST DISABLED message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE OFF Sense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled Service the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System When the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System is defective the instrument cluster will actuate a single chime once per ignition cycle and it will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYS TE
37. 165 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 45 Temperature Gauge 124 Off Road 20202 165 Child Safety Locks 22 Corrosion Protection 229 On Hills 22s ssh 165 Clean Air Gasoline 191 Cruise Light ss 126 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Climate Control 137 Cupholders o 108 Standing Water A MO CN 165 CoinHolder ss 109 Cold Weather Operation 151 RET SG ON FUSIUS o es 183 Electric Remote Mirrors 58 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 107 Electrical Power Outlets 107 Electronic Brake Control System 171 Anti Lock Brake System 171 Brake Assist System 172 Electronic Roll Mitigation 173 Electronic Stability Program 176 Traction Control System 172 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 173 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 95 Electronic Stability Program ESP 122 176 Electronic Throttle Control Warning A A mr AS de nsn 120 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC es e les od BEERS 128 Emergency In Case of Hazard Warning Flasher 204 JACKING fb ve sae y eor SE 205 Jump Starting 208 Overheating 204 TOWING si cs Ge tees at a je a Re es 210 ENGINE cisma adds EE 213 Air Cleaner o o o 218 280 Break In Recomme
38. 25 kg You must consider tongue load as part of the load on your vehicle and its GAWR 194 WARNING An improperly adjusted hitch system may reduce handling stability and braking perfor mance and could result in an accident Con sult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable trailer dealer for additional infor mation Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Breakaway Cable Attachment European braking regulations for braked trail ers up to 7 700 lbs 3 500 kg require trailers to be fitted with either a secondary coupling or breakaway cable The recommended location for attaching the normal trailers breakaway cable is in the stamped slot located on the sidewall of the hitch receiver With Attachment Point e For detachable tow bar pass the cable through the attachment point and clip it back onto itself 818e675b Detachable Ball Clip Loop Method e For fixed ball tow bar attach the clip directly Without Attachment Points e For fixed ball tow bar loop the cable around to the designated point This alternative must the neck of the tow ball If you fit the cable be specifically permitted by the trailer manu like this use a single loop only facturer since the clip may not be sufficiently strong for use in the way e For detachable ball tow bar you must follow the recommended manufacturer or supplier procedure 81866760
39. Cleaner Filter 218 Air Conditioner Maintenance 219 Air Conditioning 138 Air Conditioning Controls 138 Air Conditioning Filler 145 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 146 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 219 Air Conditioning System 138 140 AIMEE taataa Seque Gann dS eds 218 Air Pressure Tires 119 179 ABa 2 xe UE so SUE a 34 Airbag Deployment 39 Airbag Light 40 49 127 Airbag Maintenance 40 Airbag Window Side Curtain 35 Alarm Security Alarm 15 127 Alarm System Security Alarm 15 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 238 278 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 170 171 Anti Lock Warning Light 122 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 15 Appearance Care 229 Assist Hill Start 0 173 Auto Down Power Windows 24 Auto Unlock Doors 21 Automatic Dimming Mirror 57 Automatic Door Locks 21 Automatic Headlights 88 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 126 130 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 140 Automatic Transaxle 156 Automatic Transmission 157 159 226 Fluid and Filter Changes 226 Fluid Level Check 226 Fluid Type o 226 240 Gear Ranges 157 Special Additives 2
40. Front Airbags for driver and front passenger Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Re straints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Cur tains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occu pants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired ength to restrain a child seat or secure a arge item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more informa tion on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH in this section NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multi stage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the informa tion in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to k
41. If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to ac cept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owners Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e Phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owners Manual for specific in structions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries Editing names in the phonebook is recom mended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say
42. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next igni tion key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automati cally and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information TPMS Deactivation and Reactivation The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle To deactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with those not equipped with TPM Sensors Then drive the
43. In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command imme diately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the iS button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The uconnect phone will play the current con firmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it 68 Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone bat tery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise cautio
44. Level 3e Air is directed through the panel and E floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor e Air is directed through the floor outlets x with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost b and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the wind shield e Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting e Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual opera tion only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this button a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compres sor operation is selected e Recirculation Control The system will automatically con trol recirculation However press E ing the Recirculation Control but ton will temporaril
45. Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Engine Oil Selection Non ACEA Categories For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the require ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manu facturer only rec ommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Selection ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oi Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils that meet the requirements of ACEA C3 and that are approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Engine Oil Viscosity 3 7L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil im proves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom mended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in this section NOTE SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil
46. Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for O zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e In a convertible vehicle system perfor mance may be compromised with the con vertible top down Phone Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the uconnect phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume In a convertible vehicle system perfor mance may be compromised with the con vertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose con nection to the uconnect phone When this happens the connection can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system 71 Voice
47. PARK into any other gear position FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION MP3022 Selec Trac Il Transfer Case Operating Information and Precautions The Selec Trac ll active on demand transfer case provides four positions e Two wheel drive 2WD high range e Four wheel drive Auto 4WD AUTO high range e Neutral N e Four wheel drive 4WD LOW low range This transfer case is intended to be driven in either the two wheel drive position 2WD or the four wheel drive Auto position 4WD AUTO for normal street and highway conditions such as dry hard surfaced roads For added capability when traversing steep grades rough terrain or extremely poor trac tion surfaces select the transfer case 4WD LOW position This position locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together and forces the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed while multiplying engine torque Use the transfer case NEUTRAL position for recreational towing only Refer to Recreational Towing in this section for specific procedures on shifting into and out of NEUTRAL CAUTION e The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose or slippery road surfaces only Driv ing in this position on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components e When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD position or 4WD AUTO position at a given road speed Take care n
48. Qu 020205845 Ignition Switch Positions 3 On 4 Start 1 Lock 2 Acc Manual Transmission If Equipped 1 Turn the key to the ACC position 2 Push the key and cylinder inward slightly and rotate the key to the LOCK position 3 Remove the key from the lock cylinder NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC features such as the power window switches radio power sunroof or Sky Slider if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC fea tures such as the power window switches radio power sunroof or Sky Slider if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable For details re fer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Section 4 of this manual WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leav ing children in a vehicle unattended is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A
49. REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the ve hicle to roll and cause damage or injury CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake sys tem serviced by an authorized dealer imme diately ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces 170 All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The ABS conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If you have your foot ightly on the brake while this test is occurring you may feel slight pedal movement The movement can be more apparent on ice and snow This is normal The ABS pump motor runs during the self test at 12 mph 20 km h and during an ABS stop The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation which is normal WARNING e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will dimin ish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping
50. Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver seat belt remains unfas tened Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked However the belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position Children 12 years old and younger should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down ward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt from the buckle and allow it to retract com pletely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emer gency locking mode Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision This safety belt system has a retractor assem bly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This fea
51. SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE The seat will return to the memorized seat location if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set to ON when the RKE transmit ter is used to unlock the door Refer to Easy Entry Exit Seat under Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the day time causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 of this manual Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 sec
52. Sunroof Express o o ooooooo 103 56 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 1 Automatic Dimming Mirror 030406002 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during clean ing never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle 57 WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas senger side convex mirror will look
53. System 184 Mopar Parts comio eh ee a a 215 Multi Function Control Lever 87 New Vehicle Break In Period 48 Occupant Restraints 26 Occupant Restraints Sedan 35 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 190 Odometer TAD s smera fx Rome RR dear ba de 124 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 165 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 165 Oil Change Indicator 126 130 255 Oil Change Indicator Reset 126 130 255 Oil Engine 216 239 Capacity 20g sa ke ce es 238 Change Interval 126 130 DIESEL wi ca oda 217 DIPStICK aia aie cae a eh ene 216 Filler ai sp ee eee gos 218 239 Materials Added to 217 Recommendation 216 217 238 Synithietio c rd Rr ea Sib te 217 Viscosity leen 217 238 Onboard Diagnostic System 215 Operating Precautions 215 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 5f Overdrive 126 158 161 Overdrive OFF Switch 158 161 Overheating Engine 123 204 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 Paint Care x ance Je verde eee Pe E 229 Paint Damage ebay eea 229 Park Sense System Rear 97 Parking Brake ss 169 Parking On Hill 169 Passing Light 90 Personal Settings 134 PSISu tum Ren awk E eS RAS EIS d 47 Pets Transporting 47 284 Phone
54. System ABS if equipped Valve ESP J15 30Amp Rear Blower if equipped Pink if equipped J8 40 Amp Power Seats J17 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Green if equipped Green J9 40 Amp PZEV Flex Green Fuel if equipped Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse J18 20 Amp Powertrain M4 10 Amp Trailer Tow M10 15 Amp Hands Free Blue Control Module Red if equipped Blue Module HFM if PCM Transmis M5 25 Amp Power Inverter equipped sion Relay Natural if equipped Universal Garage J19 60Amp Radiator Fan M6 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Door Opener Yellow Yellow cigar lighter Rain UGDO J20 30Amp Front Wiper Sensor if if equipped Vanity Pink equipped Trailer Light J21 20 Amp Front Washer Tow if equipped Mii 10 Amp Automatic Blue Rear Washer M7 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 Red Temperature if equipped Yellow BATT ACC Control ATC J22 25 Amp Sunroof Module SELECT if equipped Natural if equipped M8 20 Amp Front Heated M12 30 Amp Radio Amplifier M1 15 Amp Stop Light Switch Yellow Seats if equipped Green if equipped Blue Feed Center M9 20 Amp Rr Heated M13 20 Amp Cabin Compart High Mounted Y
55. a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the o button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the te button to begin 65 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect phone will call the last num ber that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the uconnect phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality available on the ve hicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until a vehicle specific time expires or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone 66 e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF uco
56. and release the ON OFF button located on the end of the Electronic Speed Control lever The Cruise indicator lamp in the instru ment cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push and release the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise indicator lamp will turn off Be sure to turn the Electronic Speed Control System off when not in use NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system will automatically turn off when the engine is turned off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Elec tronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it 95 To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press down on the SET DECEL lever and release Release the accelerator and the ve hicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph 40 km h for gas engines and 31 mph 50 km h for diesel engines to set the Electronic Speed Control e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET DECEL lever To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you cancel or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the se
57. armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator lamp will flash on off 18 TOW HAUL Indicator If Equipped This light will illuminate when se lecting TOW HAUL The TOW HAUL button is located on the gearshift bezel TOW HAUL 19 4WD Indicator Vehicles Equipped with Command Trac This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the 4 Wheel Drive 4WD mode In this mode the front drive shaft and rear driveshaft are me chanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed 20 Electronic Stability Program ESPyBrake Assist System BAS Malfunction Warning Light If Equipped The malfunction warning light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition Switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning Light comes on continu ESP BAS ously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after the several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and correc
58. as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals Severe Duty Conditions t Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or 3 months if using your vehicle under any of the following severe duty conditions e Stop and go driving e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert operation 243 7 500 Miles 12 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 15 000 Miles 24 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Inspect the CV joints Perform the first i
59. as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may 14 result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electron ics See your authorized dealer if you require replacement or additional keys for your vehicle Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be pro grammed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identifica tion Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure ocation This number is required for replace ment of keys Duplication of keys consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle elec tronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed See your authorized dealer if you require replacement or additional keys for your vehicle NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming See your authorized dealer if you require re placement or additional keys for y
60. at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating tempera ture but not running check the cooling sys tem pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant antifreeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOL ANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to re move all deposits and chemicals Properly dis pose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Selection of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended en gine coolant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lu bricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in decreased corro sion protection and engine damage If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon
61. commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands e Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track e Previous Track to play the previous track e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In this mode you may say the follow ing commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the 2 button to stop recording You proceed y saying one of the following commands Save to save the memo Continue to continue recording Delete to delete the recording e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the TS button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Next to play the next memo Previous to play the previous memo Delete to delete a memo e Delete All to delete all memos 77 System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you may say the following commands e Language German e Language Dutch e Lang
62. conditions e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence 19 e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two condi tions 1 Weak battery in RKE transmitter The ex pected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward 20 Manual Lock Plunger If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Make sure the keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door NOTE The manual door locks will not lock or un lock the liftgate WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle e When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equip ment may cause severe personal injuries and death e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be serio
63. contact the distributor please provide all of the following information e Your name address and phone number e Vehicle Identification Number this 17 digit number is found on an etched plate or label located on the left front corner of the instru ment panel visible through the windshield It is also available from your vehicle registra tion or title Selling and servicing authorized dealer Vehicle s delivery date and current odometer distance 268 e Service history of your vehicle e An accurate description of the problem and the conditions under which it occurs ARGENTINA Chrysler Argentina S A Boulevard Azucena Villaflor 435 C1107Cll Buenos Aires Argentina Tel 54 11 4891 7900 Fax 54 11 4891 7901 AUSTRALIA Chrysler Australia Pacific Pty Ltd ACN 004 411 410 Chrysler Vehicle Division P O Box 4214 Mulgrave 3170 Ph 03 9566 9266 AUSTRIA Chrysler Austria Gesellschaft m b H Felmayergasse 2 A 1210 Wien Tel 43 1 5465 15131 Fax 43 1 5465 15132 BALANCE OF THE CARIBBEAN Interamericana Trading Company Warrens St Michael Barbados West Indies Tel 246 417 8000 Fax 246 425 2888 BELGIUM Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg NV Tollaan 68 B 1200 Brussel Tel 0800 94634 free phone number Fax 32 0 2 717 3301 BOLIVIA Ovando amp Cia S A Av Cristobal de Mendoza 2do Anillo y Canal Isuto Santa Cruz Bolivia Tel 591 3 336 3100 Fax 591 3 334 0229 BRAZIL Ch
64. do not overload your vehicle or trailer Over loading can cause a loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspen sion chassis structure or tires Continued WARNING Continued iF 2 Safety chains must always be used be tween your vehicle and trailer Always con nect the chains to the frame or hook retain ers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the park ing brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed be tween the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded GVWR GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential for the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Infor mation for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Informatio
65. does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash data bases such as those maintained by the gov ernment officials and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law 41 Data parameters that are recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Vehicle speed e Engine RPM e Brake switch status e Pedal position e And other parameters depending on vehicle configuration Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children 81057108 42 WARNING e Extreme Hazard Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it Refer to visor mounted labels for information e In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the
66. driv ing down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed Downshift progressively Do not skip gears to avoid over speeding the engine and clutch WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid CAUTION When descending a hill be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent over speeding the engine which can cause valve damage and or clutch disc damage even if the clutch pedal is pressed Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds CAUTION Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is pressed Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH KM H Gear 6th to 5th to 4th to 3rd to 2nd Se 5th 4th 3rd 2nd to 1st lec tion Maxi 85 75 55 35 20 mum mph mph mph mph mph Speed 135 120 88 56 32 km h km h km h km h km h 155 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at i
67. fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driv ing next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON 3 Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn off the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the com pact spare tire 2
68. fed by a segre gated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir In the event of leak age or wear use only manufacturer s recom mended brake fluid refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type Manual Transmission If Equipped Selection of Lubricant Use only the manufacturers recommended manual transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the lubricant has become contaminated with water If con taminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole 1 when the vehicle is in a level position Zoro e LO OQ 2 Q t O Q 2 072607575 1 Fill Plug 2 Drain Plug Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only to fill hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole Draining Fluid First remove the fil
69. function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any advanced airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat at tachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer ap proved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag System for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight second interval e The light flickers or comes on and remains on while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of spe cific vehicle data parameters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if ap plicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment
70. function lever to the AUTO position third de tent When the system is on the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To turn the Automatic System off turn the end of the multifunction lever out of the AUTO position 031407690 Headlight Switch NOTE The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic mode Headlights with Wipers When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center in Section 4 of this manual Headlight Time Delay This feature is particularly useful when exiting your vehicle in an unlit area It provides the safety of headlight illumination for about 90 seconds after turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position To activate the delay turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the hea
71. help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear end impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam CAUTION All occupants including the driver should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Section 3 Adjusting Active Head Re straints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 31 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the de ployed AHR at a comfortable position 3 Pull
72. hot weather above 90 F 32 C Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the transfer case fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 250 97 500 Miles 156 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t Rotate tires 105 000 Miles 168 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 112 500 Miles 180 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt J Rotate tires 1 Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary J Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi f
73. impaired by the attachment or instal lation of such parts Even if such parts are officially approved for example by a general operating permit for the part or by constructing the part in an officially approved design or if an individual operating permit was issued for the vehicle after the attachment or installation of such parts it cannot be implicitly assumed that the driving safety of your vehicle is unim paired Therefore neither experts nor official agencies are liable Therefore the manufacturer only assumes responsibility when parts which are expressly authorized or recommended by the manufacturer are attached or installed at an authorized dealer The same applies when modifications to the original condition are sub sequently made on the manufacturers ve hicles Your warranties do not cover any part that the manufacturer did not supply Nor do they cover the cost of any repairs or adjustments that might be caused or needed because of the installation or use of non manufacturer parts components equipment materials or addi tives Nor do your warranties cover the costs of repairing damage or conditions caused by any changes to your vehicle that do not comply with the manufacturers specifications Original Mopar parts and accessories and other products approved by the manufacturer including qualified advice are available at your authorized dealer When it comes to service remember that your authorize
74. inside the passenger compart ment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radia tor for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air con ditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribu tion You can select ei ther a primary mode as identified by the sym bols on the control or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level 7 Air is directed through the panel and E floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives impro
75. is not available Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to your engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and it s performance may be impaired by supplemen tal additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Diesel Engine Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after i has sat overnight For vehicles equipped with a Diesel Particulate Filter DPF it is acceptable to have an oil leve up to 3 8 inch 10 mm above the MAX line Beyond 3 8 inch 10 mm it is recommended to change the oil Checking the oil while the vehicle i
76. is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle accel eration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recom mended viscosity and quality grades are shown in Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 48 Anew engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of opera tion This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indi cation of difficulty Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine If Equipped During the first 1500 km avoid heavy loads e g driving at full throttle Do not exceed 2 3 of the maximum permissible engine speed for each gear Change gear in good time Do not shift down a gear manually in order to brake SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers EVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA
77. key into the key cylinder and turn the key to the right to unlock 2 Turn the gas cap knob to the left to remove the cap 3 When tightening the filler cap tighten until two or three clicks are heard to ensure that the cap is properly seated CAUTION e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn on e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is re moved or the tank filled e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and will cause the MIL to turn on Continued WARNING Continued e Afire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about one quarter turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tight ened e If th
78. km 4 5 Guayaquil Ecuador Tel 593 4 225 7935 Fax 593 4 224 7787 EL SALVADOR Grupo Q del Salvador Blvd Los Pr ceres y Avenida No 1 Lomas de San Francisco San Salvador El Salvador Tel 503 22730988 Fax 503 278 5731 ESTONIA Silberauto AS J rvevana tee 11 11314 Tallinn Tel 06 266 098 Tel 06 266 050 Fax 06 266 066 270 FINLAND Chrysler FinlandOy Ristipellontie 5 00390 HELSINKI Tel 020 54771 Fax 020 5477 485 FRANCE Chrysler France Parc de Rocquencourt BP100 F 78153 Le Chesnay Cedex Tel 33 1 39 23 56 00 Fax 33 1 39 23 57 92 GERMANY Chrysler Deutschland GmbH Englische StraBe 30 D 10587 Berlin Telefon 49 0 30 2690 0 Telefax 49 0 30 2690 3999 GRAND DUCHY OF LUXEMBOURG NT MAILFAS C O Chrysler Belgium Luxembourg BRU BRU 37850 Antwoord Nummer 193032 1930 Zaventem Belgium Tel 0800 6661 Fax 32 02 717 33 GREECE Chrysler Jeep Dodge Hellas 240 242 Kifisias Avenue 15231 Halandri Athens Greece Tel 30 210 6700800 Fax 30 210 6700820 GUATEMALA Grupo Q del Guatemala Edificio Grupo Q calle Mariscal Cruz 9 04 Zona 4 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala Tel 502 6685 9500 HONDURAS Grupo Q de Honduras Blvd Centro Am rica frente a Plaza Miraflores Tegucigalpa Honduras Tel 504 235 9220 Fax 504 232 6564 HUNGARY Chrysler Automotive Hungaria Kft H 1133 Budapest Karpat u 21 Tel 36 1 887 7000 Fax 36 1 887 7098 IRELAND C
79. km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recom mended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been estab lished for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres sure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from
80. located in the rear cargo area inside the ve hicle Use the lug wrench to rotate the nut counterclockwise until the spare is on the ground with enough slack in the cable to allow you to pull the tire out from under the vehicle Lowering Raising Spare Tire CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack extension tube only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recom mended and they can damage the winch When the spare is clear tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and pull it through the center of the wheel 205 Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible Avoid icy or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmission or REVERSE manual transmis sion 4 Turn the ignition to the LOCK position 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher 206 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rear wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow the
81. makes the stopping dis tance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded e The ABS cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents e The capabilities of an ABS equipped ve hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the users safety or the safety of others CAUTION The ABS is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele phones NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the ABS is functioning e Do not ride the brakes by resting your foot on the pedal This could overheat the brakes and result in unpredictable braking action longer stopping distances or brake dam age e When descending mountains or hills re peated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmis sion or locking out overdrive
82. off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automati cally In addition the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 min utes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 189 TPMS Deactivation amp Reactivation The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with wheel and tire assemblies that do not have TPMS Sensors such as when installing winter wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle To deactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with those not equipped with TPM Sensors Then drive the vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h The TPMS will chime and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message and the graphic w
83. on the lower switch bank below the climate controls Headlight Leveling Switch 89 To operate press the headlight leveling switch until the appropriate number which corre sponds to the load listed on the following chart illuminates on the switch 0 Driver only or driver and front passenger 1 All seating positions occupied 2 All seating positions occupied plus an evenly distributed load in the luggage compart ment The total weight of pas sengers and load does not exceed the maximum load capacity of the vehicle 3 Driver plus an evenly distrib uted load in the luggage com partment The total weight of the driver and load does not exceed the maximum load capacity of the vehicle Calculations based on a passenger weight of 165 lbs 75 kg Turn Signals ove the multifunction lever upward or down ward and the corresponding turn signal indica 90 tor on the instrument panel will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407683 Turn Signal Control You can signal a lane change by moving the lever upward or downward partially without moving beyond the detent If either turn signal indicator has a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved see your authorized dealer for ser vice High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch th
84. or owing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing e Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning op erating conditions e Do not allow vehicle to run out of fuel NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions con trol systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you 221 Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine cool ant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant antifreeze Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C condenser if equipped or the back of the radiator core 222 Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tight ness of the connection
85. or automated cus tomer service Some services require immedi ate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the e button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of num bers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer ser vice center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored uconnect M phone book entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the 1 button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconnect M phone will then send the corresponding phone num ber associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal 67 e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge
86. smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated when ever you turn on the rear window de froster Refer to Rear Window Features in this section for further information Power Mirrors The power mirror switches are located on the driver s door trim panel 58 Power Mirror Switch Models with Express Window Feature Press and release the mirror select button marked L left or R right and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing The selec tion will time out after 30 seconds of inactivity to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position following an adjustment NOTE For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat you can use your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or the memory switch on the instrument panel to return the power mirrors to pre programmed posi tions Refer to Driver Memory Seat in this section for details Models without Express Window Feature Press the mirror select button marked L left or R right and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the a
87. soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these tempera tures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater available from your autho rized dealer is recommended 151 If Engine Fails to Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious per sonal injury e Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Section 6 of this manual for proper jump starting procedures and follow them care fully 152 Without Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have fo
88. the Preferred Procedure or completely stopped using the Alternate Procedure Preferred Procedure 1 With the engine RUNNING slow the vehicle speed to 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h 2 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 While still rolling move the transfer case switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is on not flashing shift the transmission into gear Alternate Procedure 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine OFF or RUNNING shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 3 Move the transfer case switch to the desired position 4 After the desired position indicator light is on not flashing shift the transmission into gear NOTE Steps 1 and 2 in the Preferred Procedure and the Alternate Procedure are require ments for shifting the transfer case If these requirements are not met prior to attempting the shift or while the shift attempt is in process then the indicator light will flash and the current transfer case position will be maintained To retry a shift move the trans fer case switch back to the original position make certain all shift requirements have been met wait five seconds and try the shift again The ignition switch must be in the ON posi tion for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position
89. the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed i e functional RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the RKE transmitter LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE trans mitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm acti vated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the ve hicle Security Alarm To Unlatch the Liftgate Flip Up Window Press the Rear Release button twice to unlatch the liftgate flip up window WARNING To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass will automatically rise Express Down Window Feature If Equipped This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Program ming
90. the TOW HAUL button This will improve performance and re duce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting When oper ating in TOW HAUL mode the transmission will shift into third gear NOTE TOW HAUL mode locks out Overdrive Tow Haul Button The TOW HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has been activated Pressing the switch a second time restores normal operation If the TOW HAUL mode is desired the switch must be pressed each time the engine is started Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Trans mission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in sec ond gear in any forward driving range To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever into the PARK position 3 Turn the engine off and turn the key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the engine 5 Move the shift lever into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the trans mission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEU TRAL will continue to operate Only second gear range will operate in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your au
91. the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioner is triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed air bag and or pretensioner must be replaced im mediately Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable components and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head re straint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic How the Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC de termines whether the severity or type of rear impact require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy In case of AHR deployment both driver and front passenger seat AHR s will be deployed When AHR s deploy during a rear impact the head restraint front half extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the head and the AHR This system is designed to
92. the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road appli cations Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu vers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS When To Use 4WD LOW Range When off road driving shift to 4WD LOW for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situa tions such as deep snow mud or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4WD LOW range 165 Driving Through Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through water there are a number of precau tions that must be considered b
93. to pre vent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the ve hicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short pe riod adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions re paired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Continued 191 WARNING Continued e Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from enter ing the vehicle FUEL REQUIREMENTS DIESEL ENGINES Use Premium Quality Diesel fuels with a Cetane rating of 50 or higher and meeting the EN590 standard are highly recommended See your authorized dealer for further information re garding fuels available in your area ADDING FUEL Locking Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The locking cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use with this vehicle 192 EN 81937590 Fuel Filler Cap 1 Insert the
94. to the vehicle interior can occur Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not leave the Sky Slider open for several weeks at a time Close it occasion ally to prevent discoloration in the folds of the fabric and to allow the creases to smooth out This is especially important if the Sky Slider was opened when not completely dry WARNING Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you e In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with the Sky Slider open Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too e Before operating the Sky Slider make sure that no moving parts of the Sky Slider can injure a person or animal Continued WARNING Continued e Never place any extremities hands feet etc near the Sky Slider components or the roof area while operating the Sky Slider e If potential danger exists while opening or closing the Sky Slider in Automatic Mode press and release the switch imme diately to interrupt the operation e If potential danger exists while opening or closing the Sky Slider in Operator Mode release the switch immediately to interrupt the operation e Do not allow small children to operate the Sky Slider e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants
95. wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimen sions and performance characteristics re sulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steer ing and suspension components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle e Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can re sult in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings TIRE CHAINS Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet SAE type Class S specifications Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as recommended by the chain manufacturer In addition only install tire chains on P225 75R16 or smaller tires CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle tires or chains observe the following precautions e Donotuse tire cha
96. 0 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic ob jects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the right rear quarter win dow This is where the compass sensor is located 12 wm a UA d 80bbc346 Compass Variance Map 138 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approximately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT but ton until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the vehicle speed is at O mph 0 km h manual transmission or when the shift lever is in PARK auto transmission Press and release the MENU button until
97. 215 Replacement Tires 182 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 126 130 Restraint Head iu uocem rs 80 Restraints Child 42 Restraints Occupant 26 Retractable Cargo Area Cover 111 Roll Over Warning 4 Roof Head Restraints 80 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 145 Sky Slider Power 104 227 Heated ox dt Ae 82 Signals Turn 49 90 121 236 237 Roof Type Carrier 114 Height Adjustment 80 Sky Slider Power Roof 104 227 Rotation Ties imeem ns 183 Lumbar Support 79 Snow Chains Tire Chains 183 MEMORY onal macai es a ad 84 Sound Systems Radio 136 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 49 POWGE tue ue or Saeed D 80 Sound Systems Refer to the Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 49 Rear Folding ss lud RR are 83 Sound Systems Booklet Safety ExhaustGas 48 REGNING s eso Re en 79 Spare Te io cv e eR x 181 205 Safety TIPS ee 48 Sea back Release 83 Speed Control Cruise Control 95 Schedule Maintenance 242 255 Utes ee i es 80 Speedometer NEN LLL 121 Seat Belt Maintenance 231 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 15 Stating uus o a a 151 Seat Belt Reminder 30 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 239 Automatic Transmission 151 Seat Belts 27 49 Selec Trac Operation 162
98. 227 Sun Visor Extension 59 Sunroof Maintenance 104 Supplemental Restraint System RIDAD E adorar ty oy ie he 34 Synthetic Engine Oil 217 Tachometer 122 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 140 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 124 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 45 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 15 Theft System Security Alarm 15 Tie Down Hooks Cargo 110 Tilt Steering Column 94 Time Delay Headlight 89 MOS s oed ou e Re 49 179 Air Pressure 179 A hk heen ra eee eee 183 Changing 205 Compact Spare 181 General Information 179 286 Inflation Pressures i i i l l l l l l l Pressure Monitor System TPMS DS Tread Wear Indicators ies To Open Hood Minimum Requirements 196 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight Torque Converter Clutch Tow Haul Indicator Light Behind a Motor Home Disabled Vehicle Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home Traction Control Cooling System Tips Trailer and Tongue Weight 196 MIEIDOU inicio i 198 Trailer Towing Guide 196 Trailer Weight 196 MANSAXIEE votos o a G 156 AutomallG o is bem 156 Operation 156 Transfer Case 0 227 Elida aca oe heh a A 227 240 Four Wheel Drive Operation 162 Maintenance 227 Tra
99. 26 Torque Converter 159 162 AUOSUCK 2 ubere 160 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 107 Auxiliary Power Outlet 107 Axle Fluid ooo 240 Battety 4 ugs nw ei ps 218 Charging System Light 121 Emergency Starting 208 Jump Starting 208 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE oe Saja SR EER Bae dede 19 Belts Seat 27 49 Body Mechanism Lubrication 220 Brake Assist System 172 Brake Assist Warning Light 122 Brake Control System Electronic 171 Brake Fluid 2s seme Rex 240 Brake Parking amp a con demas 169 Brake System 225 Anti Lock ABS 170 171 Master Cylinder 225 Parkifig ie woe dE es 169 Warning Light 24 5 4 sae es 126 Brake Transmission Interlock 156 Break In Recommendations New VENICIE op ap Ba oA Bene pope ad 48 Bulb Replacement 235 236 Bulbs Light 49 235 Calibration Compass 132 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 137 Customer Assistance 268 Capacities Fluid 238 Compact Spare Tire 181 Caps Filler Compass pda gei a 131 Defroster Rear Window 113 ON 192 Compass Calibration 132 Defroster Windshield 49 139 143 Power Steering 168 Compass Variance 132 Delay Intermittent W
100. 3 220 AO E 220 Windshield Wiper Blades 220 Windshield Wipers 91 Wiper Delay 92 Wiper Rear 112 Wipers Intermittent 92 Wipers Rain Sensitive 93 Wrecker Towing 210 287
101. 81806762 Fixed Ball Neck Loop Method 818e675d Detachable Ball Neck Loop Method Fixed Ball Clip Loop Method 195 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Model Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Tongue Wt See Note 3 7L Automatic 4x4 6 172 lbs 2 800 kg 308 Ibs 140 kg 2 8L Diesel 6 Speed Manual 4x4 6 172 lbs 2 800 kg 308 lbs 140 kg 2 8L Diesel Automatic 4x4 6 172 lbs 2 800 kg 275 lbs 125 kg Maximum trailer towing speed is limited to 62 mph 100 km h unless local laws require a lower speed For trailer weights above 3 500 Ibs 1 588 kg the use of a trailer sway dampening device is necessary NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be consid ered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never ex ceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Trailer and Tongue Weight Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely from side to side which will cause loss of con trol of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents 196 Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight
102. 889 UNITED KINGDOM Chrysler UK Ltd Tongwell Milton Keynes MK15 8BA Tel 01908 301090 Fax 01908 301203 URUGUAY Malunix S A Miguelete 2276 Montevideo Uruguay Tel 598 2 401 7818 Fax 598 2 402 2666 VENEZUELA Chrysler de Venezuela LLC Avenida Pancho Pepe Croquer Zona Industrial Norte Valencia Estado Caraboro Tel 58 241 613 2400 Fax 58 241 613 2538 Fax 58 241 6132602 58 241 6132438 PO BOX 1960 Services And Parts Zona Industrial Il Av Norte Sur 5 C C Calle Este Oeste C C LD Center Local B 2 Valencia Estado Carabobo Telf 58 241 6132757 58 241 6132773 Fax 58 241 6132743 273 CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP NOTIFICATION MODEL REGISTRATION OR LICENSE NUMBER wi me me oqog A A EA de op or tj NEW OWNER S NAME NEW OWNER S ADDRESS IF RESOLD BY CHRYSLER JEEP DEALERSHIP TELEPHONE NO ENTER DEALER STAMP IN BOX ABOVE FIRST OWNER 80140712 274 CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP NOTIFICATION MODEL REGISTRATION OR LICENSE NUMBER wi me me oqog A A EA de op or tj NEW OWNER S NAME NEW OWNER S ADDRESS IF RESOLD BY CHRYSLER JEEP DEALERSHIP TELEPHONE NO ENTER DEALER STAMP IN BOX ABOVE SECOND OWNER 80140753 275 276 About Your Brakes 169 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 122 170 171 Adding Fuel s mae 192 Additives Fuel 191 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air
103. Bank Electronic if equipped Red a iid es M28 10 Amp Powertrain Red Control Module equipped Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse M29 10 Amp Occupant M35 10 Amp Heated Mirrors if Red Classification Mod Red equipped ule OCM M36 20 Amp Power Outlet 3 M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Mod Yellow BATT Blue ule if equipped M37 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Diagnostic Link Red System ABS M31 20 Amp Back Up Lights Electronic Stability Yellow Program ESP M32 10 Amp Occupant Module Stop Light Red Restraint Switch Controller ORC M38 25 Amp Door and Liftgate M33 10 Amp Powertrain Control Natural Lock Unlock Motors Red Module PCM M34 10 Amp Park Assist CAUTION Red Module if e When installing the Integrated Power Mod equipped Heating ule cover it is important to ensure the cover Ventilation and Air is properly positioned and fully latched Conditioning Failure to do so may allow water to get into HVAC Module the Integrated Power Module and possibl if equipped eg anap y Compass Module result in an electrical system failure if equipped Continued CAUTION Continued e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct am perage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
104. Cold Weather 151 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Sentry Key Immobilizer 13 16 Emergency Jump Starting 208 Anchorage oo 29 Sentry Key Programming 14 Engine Fails to Start 152 And Pregnant Women 34 Service Assistance 268 Manual Transmission 151 Child Restraint 42 46 Service Engine Soon Light Starting and Operating 151 Front Seat ooo sss 27 Malfunction Indicator 120 Starting Procedures 151 Inspection sss 49 Settings Personal 134 Starting Procedures Diesel Engines 153 Pretensioners ooo oo LLL LaLa 30 Shift Lock Manual Override 156 Steering Reminder 2 126 Shifting POWeL guaia esi bal Se ii mets ed 168 Shoulder Belt Anchorage 29 Automatic Transmission 157 159 TitColumn lesen 94 Untwisting Procedure 30 Manual Transmission 154 Wheel Lock 13 Seats 0 2 LLL sh 78 Transfer Case 162 163 Wheel Tilt 94 Adjustment 78 Shoulder Belts 27 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Easy EMMY 86 Side Repeater Lights 237 System Controls 136 Side View Mirror Adjustment 57 SIMAO eh coe A aes eR Bas A 109 StorageBifi cuca eem a 109 Storage Vehicle 145 SunRoof c9 x REG 103 Sun Roof Sky Slider Power 104
105. Controller System serviced as well 39 Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag de ployment if the communication network re mains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically 40 Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steer ing wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards Continued WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not
106. EDR data is ONLY re corded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation the elec tronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the pos sible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initi ated by Chrysler Group LLC such investiga tions may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations n the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initia tive the company or its designated represen tative will first obtain permission of the appro priate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that
107. ESP Indicator 122 176 178 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 120 EXIGHOE lod ke Ero 49 EOG sns A uua RUE p dois a hes 89 127 237 Four Wheel Drive Indicator 122 123 125 164 Hazard Warning Flasher 204 Headlight Leveling 89 Headlight Switch 87 88 Headlights 88 236 Headlights On Reminder 89 Headlights On With Wipers 88 93 High Beam essem eae 90 121 High Beam Indicator 121 High Beam Low Beam Select 90 Hill Descent Control Indicator 122 175 Illuminated Entry 17 Instrument Cluster 87 119 Lights On Reminder 89 lOW F el 4 us Pe da os 119 LOW Tire ei toa be Shaw 119 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 120 Oil Pressure 121 PaK caca a cd e SE Neg 87 88 icio MP 90 Rear Servicing 237 Rear Tall uz aio ee We ok ex n8 237 Seat Belt Reminder 126 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 16 Service iex a dat 235 236 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 120 Side Marker liso 236 Side Repeater 237 Tire Pressure Monitoring PMS catas a Bode 119 184 Tow Haul Indicator 122 Traction Control 176 178 Transfer Case 164 Turn Signal 49 87 90 121 236 237 Vanity Mirror oios a ess 58 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 119 Load Floor Car
108. G A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper locations JUMP STARTING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an auto matic transmission cannot be started this way Also there is a greater risk of an accident when a vehicle is being pushed or towed If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another ve 208 hicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure care fully WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be hurt by the fan e Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution that can cause serious burns do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Wear safety glasses and protect your eyes at all times If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush contaminated area immedi ately with large quantities of water Continued WARNING Continued e A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flamm
109. If you do not have a programmed RKE trans mitter contact your authorized dealer for de tails Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Remove the screw from the RKE transmitter case if equipped 2 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade tool to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter case apart Make sure not to damage the seal during removal 81182c72 Separating Case Halves 3 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 4 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together 5 Reinstall and tighten the screw until snug if equipped General Information Transmitters and receivers operate on a carrier frequency of 433 92 MHz as required by EEC regulations These devices must be certified to conform to specific regulations in each indi vidual country Two sets of regulations are involved ETS European Telecommunication Standard 300 220 which most countries use and German BZT federal regulation 2252125 which is based on ETC 300 220 but has addi tional unique requirements Other defined re quirements are noted in ANNEX VI of COMMIS SION DIRECTIVE 95 56 EC Operation is subject to the following two
110. Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps NOTE You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 90 seconds 1 Center the steering wheel front wheels pointing straight forward 2 Shift the transmission into PARK automatic transmission or NEUTRAL manual transmis Sion 3 Apply the parking brake 4 Start the engine 5 Release the clutch pedal manual transmis Sion 6 Rotate the steering wheel 1 2 turn to the left 7 Press the ESP OFF button located in the lower switch bank below the climate control four times within 20 seconds The ESP TCS Indicator light should turn on and turn off two times 8 Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional V2 turn to the right 9 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position If the se quence was completed properly the ESP TCS Indicator light will blink several times to con firm HSA is disabled 10 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in off road driving conditions by applying the brakes when necessary When enabled HDC senses the terrain and activates when the vehicle is descending a hill HDC speed may be adjusted b
111. J IRELAND CONCESSIONAIRES LIMITED Clonlara Avenue Baldonnell Business Park Baldonnell Dublin 22 Ireland Tel 1890 946866 ITALY Chrysler Italia S r l Via Giulio Vincenzo Bona 110 00156 Roma Tel 06 41442812 Fax 06 418823114 E mail talktoGchrysler com LATVIA TC MOTORS LTD 40 Krasta Str LV 1003 Riga Tel 07 812 312 FAX 07 812 313 LITHUANIA Silberauto AS Laisves av 125 A LT 2022 VILNIUS Tel 02 301037 Fax 02 301036 NETHERLANDS Chrysler Nederland B V Postbus 2088 NL 3500 GB Utrecht Tel 31 0 30 247 19 11 Fax 31 0 30 247 16 00 NEW ZEALAND Chrysler New Zealand Private Bag 14907 Panmure New Zealand Tel 09573 7800 Fax 09573 7808 NORWAY Chrysler Norge A S Solheimveien 7 N 1471 L renskog Tel 47 67 92 60 00 Fax 47 67 90 53 10 PANAMA Grupo Q de Panam Calle 50 Final Edificio 68 San Francisco Panam Panam Tel 507 303 1100 Fax 507 303 0980 PARAGUAY Cencar S A Avda Mariscal Lopez No 5700 Asuncion Paraguay Tel 59521515911 Fax 59521515924 271 PERU Divemotor S A Calle Alejandro Bussalleu 151 Urb Sta Cat alina La Victoria Lima Peru Tel 51 1 712 2000 Fax 51 1 712 2002 POLAND Chrysler Polska Sp z 0 0 ul Gotlieba Daimlera 1 02 480 Warszawa Tel 801 330 300 PORTUGAL Chrysler Portugal S A Qta da Fonte Edif D Am lia Rua Victor C mara 2 12A 2770 229 Paco de Arcos Portugal Tel 351 0 21 323 91
112. KE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock If Equipped When ON is selected you can use your RKE transmitter to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat side mirror adjustable pedals if equipped and power tilt and telescopic steer ing column if equipped and a set of desired radio station presets When OFF is selected only the memory switch on the driver s door panel will recall memory profiles To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Refer to Driver Memory Seat in Section 3 of this manual for more information Rain Sensing Intermittent Wipers If Equipped When ON is selected the system will automati cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield To make your se lection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears When OFF is selected the system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit If Equipped This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION
113. M message Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition the EVIC will display the SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM message for as long as the vehicle is in RE VERSE Under this condition ParkSense will not operate If SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC after making sure the rear fascia bumper is clean and clear of snow ice mud dirt or other obstruction see your authorized dealer The ParkSense system uses four sensors lo cated in the rear bumper fascia to scan for obstacles up to 79 in 200 cm away from the rear bumper fascia The warning display lo cated above in the Instrument Cluster s EVIC provides both visible and audible warnings to indicate the range of the object Cleaning the ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water car wash soap and a soft cloth Do not use rough or hard cloths Do not scratch or poke the sen sors Otherwise you could damage the sen sors ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow ice mud dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly Jackhammers large trucks and other vi brations could affect the performance of ParkSense When you turn ParkSense off the instru ment cluster will display PARK ASSIST DISABLED Furthermore
114. Per sonal Settings displays in the EVIC 134 Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of six languages for all display nomenclature includ ing the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Dutch Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors will lock auto matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT but ton until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the R
115. REVISIONS AT ANY TIME This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering spe cialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle It is supple mented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Fol lowing the instructions and recommendations in this Owner s Manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle After you have read the Owner s Manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or to make additions to or improvements in its products without imposing any obligations upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured The Owner s Manual illustrates and describes the features that are standard or available as extra cost options Therefore some of the equipment and accessories in this publication may not appear on your vehicle NOTE Be sure to read the Owner s Manual first before driving your vehicle and before at taching or installing parts accessories or making other modifications to the vehicle In view of the many replacement parts and accessories from various manufacturers avail able on the market the manufacturer cannot be certain that the driving safety of your vehicle will not be
116. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and un comfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 179 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage it nflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximu
117. Sensing feature may not func tion properly when ice or dried salt water is present on the windshield e Use of Rain X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce rain sensor performance e The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features un 94 der Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Section 4 of this manual The Rain Sensing system has protective fea tures for the wiper blades and arms It will not operate under the following conditions e Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is first switched ON the vehicle is stationary and the outside temperature is below 32 F 0 C If the wiper control is moved the vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph 0 km h or the outside tempera ture rises above freezing the rain sensing feature will then operate Neutral Wipe Inhibit The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the ignition is ON and the shift lever is in the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph 8 km h unless the wiper control is moved or the shift lever is moved out of the NEUTRAL position TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering col umn upward or downward The tilt control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end o
118. The rocker switch allows the driver to recall either of the two pre programmed memory profiles by pressing the appropriate side of the switch Driver Memory Switch Programming the Memory Feature To create a new memory profile perform the following NOTE Saving a new memory profile will erase an existing profile from memory 1 Turn the ignition ON 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences i e seat side mirror and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET button on the memory switch then press the side of the rocker switch labeled 1 within five seconds The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped will display which memory position is being set If desired a second memory profile can be stored into memory as follows 1 Turn the ignition ON 2 Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences i e seat side mirror and radio station presets 3 Press and release the SET button on the memory switch then press the side of the rocker switch labeled 2 within five seconds The EVIC if equipped will display which memory position is being set NOTE e For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK but the ve hicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile e For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph 0 km h to recall a memory prof
119. To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratching the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thin ner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a par ticular disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather 137 Manual Heating and Air Conditioning 045607535 The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode The blower Speed increases as you move the control to the ce d m 138 right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the tempera ture of the air
120. Tree Main Menu Breakdown English UConnect EN Espanol A E Tutorial Francais German Italian Dutch Last Enter Enter Number Name Number on Phone is redialed See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart Number associated Number The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030609126 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Phonebook Entries Listed one Enter Name at a time 1st Confirmation Enter Location Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Enter Number Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added 81c6bf80 73 74 Voice Tree Setup Setup Service Toggle Pair List Phones New phone Select a language Confirmation will temporarily Prompts on off Say 4 digit override pin code Phones S phone elect phone A to be deleted List Phones priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing Phone Deleted System System Lists confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605582
121. UTRAL position disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the power train and it will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shifting into NEUTRAL Perform the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Shut OFF the engine 3 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine 4 Press the brake pedal 5 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 6 Use the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object to press the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button for four seconds After the shift is complete and the NEUTRAL light turns on release the NEUTRAL button 7 Start the engine 8 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 9 Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement 10 Repeat Steps 8 and 9 with the transmission in DRIVE 11 Shut OFF the engine 4 2 Apply the parking brake 13 Turn the ignition switch to the unlocked OFF position 14 Shift the transmission into PARK 15 Attach the vehicle to a tow vehicle with a tow bar 4 6 Disconnect the battery negative cable 4 7 Release the parking brake 201 NOTE e Steps 1 through 5 are requirements for shifting the transfer case If these require ments are not met prior to pres
122. Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authori ties to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing the engine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating tempera 224 ture is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may ob serve vapor coming from the front
123. Wheel Drive Auto High Range This ac tive on demand range makes available opti mum traction for a wide range of conditions while maximizing driver convenience This po sition is always in four wheel drive mode with a 163 normal 42 front axle 58 rear axle torque split The system also anticipates and prevents slip by redirecting torque as necessary up to 100 to the front or rear axle if needed 4WD Low Four Wheel Drive Low Range This range is for ow speed four wheel drive Locks the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed Additional traction and maximum pull ing power for loose or slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h N Neutral This range disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the power train To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in this section for more information Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The four wheel drive indicator lights 4WD 4 LOW are located in the instrument cluster The NEUTRAL indicator light is located on the transfer case switch If there is no indicator light on or flashing the transfer case position is two wheel drive 2WD If the indicator light is 164 on the desired position 4WD AUTO 4WD LOW or NEUTRAL has been obtained If one or more shift requirements are not met e An indicator light will flash
124. able and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other e Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greater than 12 Volt system i e do not use a 24 Volt power source 1 Wear eye protection and remove all meta jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets tha might make an unintended electrical contact 2 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without allowing the vehicles to touch WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Set the parking brake place the automatic transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL for manual transmission and turn the ignition OFF for both vehicles 4 Turn off the heater radio and all unneces sary electrical loads 5 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the positive battery post Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery 6 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis charged battery Make sure you have a good contact on the engine ground WARNING e Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The result ing electrical spark could cause the batter
125. ackup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes discon nected prior to deployment 37 e Also the ORC turns on the Air bag Warning Light for six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned ON After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or con tinuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup e Y WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the 38 airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on collision severity and type The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags
126. aints approved for use in this mass group L Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list These restraints may be of the specific vehicle restricted or semi universal categories B Built in restraint approved for this mass group Infants And Small Children e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the ve direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child re straints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag An airbag deploy 43 ment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an in
127. ake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position 160 WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substi tute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in REVERSE You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL Shift into NEUTRAL when the vehicle is stand ing for prolonged periods with the engine run ning The engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual DRIVE The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all nor mal operating conditions E
128. al override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal pressed To oper ate the shift lock manual override perform the following steps 1 Turn the key to the ON position but do not start the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Using a flat blade screwdriver carefully re move the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down Shift Lock Manual Override 6 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL posi tion 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEU TRAL Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual over ride has been used Four Speed Automatic Transmission 3 7L Engine NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 6 F 21 C and when in DRIVE transmission Operation may be briefly limited to only second gear operation Normal operation will resume once the transmission tempera ture has risen to a suitable level Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever Gear Ranges PARK This ran
129. allows the heater core to act as a supple ment to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dan gerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift e The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The scissor type jack and tire changing tools are located in the cargo compartment behind a trim cover on the left rear trim panel The latch is located at the bottom of the trim cover Jack Storage Location Spare Tire Stowage The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the vehicle and is held in place by a cable winch mechanism Spare Tire Removal Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut
130. amaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a CHECK gASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tight ened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the mes sage will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed perfor mance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufactur er s warranty MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engi neers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future 215 CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when neces sary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negati
131. ark safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the air conditioner is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the needle remains on the H mark turn the engine off immediately and call for service 124 NOTE The gauge pointer will remain near its last reading when the engine is turned off It will return to a true reading when the engine is restarted CAUTION Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the engine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature indicator ifthe engine overheats 24 Transmission Temperature Warning Light If Equipped This light indicates that the trans mission fluid temperature is run ning hot This may occur with se vere usage such as trailer towing Ifthis light turns on safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission dam age or transmission failure WARNING In some circumstances a Transmission Tem perature Warning Light under continued op eration could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 25 Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button Changing the Display Press this button to chang
132. art way press the window Switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the Switch briefly For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 sec onds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is program mable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Set 24 tings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped On some models the driver s and front passen ger s if equipped for passenger side power window switches have an Auto Up feature Pull the window switch up to the second detent release and the window will go up automati cally To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto Up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way pull the window Switch up to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop
133. as possible e Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued CAUTION Continued e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recom mended Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows ex tended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 105 000 miles 168 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this ex tended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please re view these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MO PAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are antici pated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or
134. ator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an ex tended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 7 500 miles 12 000 km or six months whichever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this scheduled oil change is per formed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Required in Use Factory Settings of the EVIC section in this manual or under Odometer Trip Odom eter in the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this manual At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder add
135. cated on the rear surface of the steering wheel The left and right controls are rocker type switches with a pushbutton in the center of each switch Reach behind the steering wheel to access the Switches 045003761 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel Right Hand Switch Functions e Press the top of the switch to increase the volume Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume Press the button in the center of the switch to change modes i e AM FM etc Left Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation e Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to the next preset that you have pro grammed Left Hand Switch Functions for Media i e CD Operation e Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next track e Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play e Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the second track three times to listen to the third track and so forth e Press the button located in the center of the switch to change to the next preset that you have programmed CD DVD MAINTENANCE
136. ccur even if the mes sage was cleared previously WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability Full Off mode is only intended for off highway or off road use ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Malfunc tion Indicator light and the ESP TCS Indicator light in the instru ment cluster both turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both turn off with the engine run ning If the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator light turns on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator light and the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator light will turn on momentarily each time the igni tion switch is turned ON ESP BAS e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzz ing or clicking sounds when it
137. child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key If the steer ing wheel is moved approximately a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel With the engine running rotate the steering wheel one half revolution from the straight ahead position turn OFF the engine and re move the key Rotate the steering wheel slightly in both directions until the lock engages To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel sli
138. cking up Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limi tations of this system and recommendations ParkSense will remember the last system state enabled or disabled from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN ON position ParkSense can be active only when the shift lever is in REVERSE If ParkSense is enabled at this shift lever position the system will be active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 11 mph 18 km h or above The system will be active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approxi mately 10 mph 16 km h ParkSense Sensors The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear fascia bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors field of view The sensors can detect obstacles from ap proximately 12 in 30 cm up to 79 in 200 cm from the rear fascia bumper in the horizontal direction depending on the location type and orientation of the obstacle 97 ParkSense Warning Display The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the Customer Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 The ParkSense Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster s EVIC display It pro vides b
139. cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Informa tion in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pres sure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjust ment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason in cluding low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pres sure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the up dated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25
140. ct phone can be used with Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular 59 phones Some phones may not support all the uconnect phone features If your cellular phone supports a different profile e g Head set Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cel lular service provider or the phone manufac turer for details The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehicle s audio system The volume of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Compatible Phones The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile version 1 0 or higher See uconnect website for supported phones e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect 60 To find the list of compatible phones navigate through the following menus e Select model year for the vehicle e Select type of the vehicle e Mark the box if radio is equipped with Navi gation e In the getting started tab select compatible phones Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice com mands are required after most uconnect
141. ct sen sors at the front of the car The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deploy ment The timing of the second stage deter mines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is ex pended WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional These protec tive covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating e Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely af fected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury e Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Continued WARNING Continued e Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citi zen band radios etc e Do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags offer si
142. d Position the jack handle on the jack Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 80f35497 Front Jacking Location 80f354b4 Rear Jacking Location 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire ift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased lever age Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tight 207 ness is 95 ft Ib 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to it s fully closed position WARNIN
143. d dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satis faction Copyright 2009 Chrysler International HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you de sire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all sub jects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual a qw amp D e 7 4 a UO WIPER FAILURE OUTLET SPEED CONTROL ASSIST SYSTEM m e Cs gt a T l ae i amp M D e 4 al e 0 2 D FUEL REAR TENT WPER E D nod ue pou OUTLEN ama a SEAT Ds HILL DESCENT MARENG BARING A US o PP S Qo 7 7 Z0 e G9 FUEL FILL SIDE by G m DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE URAN RECIRCULATION Pii TRACTION nm a Pe p mrg E 00 OF CS gj E X 4WDI BRAKE ENGINE OIL REAR WINDOW OCA PARK LIGHTS REAR FOG Io VEA DEFMOS AND VENTILATINGFAN WINDOW LOCK TLE FOUR WHEEL Annis PARC DEFROST HEATED LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE KR fin gt TOW O qp y v Des A mw pf HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD BEAT BELT SLIDING DOOR Tm AIR CONDITIONING A recocon WARNING TOW HAUL CO 4
144. d it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis tance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery 204 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating your en gine by taking the appropriate action e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped put transmis sion in NEUTRAL but do not increase en gine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could dam age your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This
145. damage e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain com ponents steering and suspension Re tighten them if required and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts e After extended operation in mud sand wa ter or similar dirty conditions have brake rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible WARNING Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might not have full braking power when you need it to prevent an accident If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary e f you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Im 167 pacted material can cause a wheel imbal ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is inter rupted it will still be possible to steer your ve
146. de impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat out board occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features in flated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the poten tial for side impact head injuries The SABIC airbags deploy downward covering both win dows on the impact side 35 NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pre tensioners and or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment The system includes sensors adjacent to both ront and rear seat occupants that are cali brated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occupant protec tion WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions 36 Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Ad vanced Front Airbags work with the knee bol sters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with
147. ded e The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the Out side Air position for maximum defogging e The A C will engage automatically to pre vent fogging when the recirculation but ton is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor e The A C can be deselected manually with out disturbing the mode control selection e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled 139 Air Conditioning Control Press this button to en gage the Air Condition ing A light will illumi nate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indi cates cooler tempera tures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tempera tures NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX A C For maximum cooling use the A C and recircu lation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature 140 Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped Automatic Temperature Control Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system au tomatically mainta
148. deionized water when mixing the water antifreeze coolant solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant an tifreeze and will require more frequent en gine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to en sure that the engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine cool ant antifreeze when the engine is over heated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or engine damage may result 223 Disposal of
149. displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e RKE Battery Low with a single chime e Memory 1 2 Profile Set emory 1 2 Profile Recall emory System Disabled Vehicle Not in Park with a single chime automatic transmission emory System Disabled Vehicle in Motion with a single chime manual transmission emory System Disabled Seat Belt Buck ed with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park automatic transmission Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle in otion manual transmission Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Liftgate Ajar with a single chime Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure M
150. ditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos sible within the next 500 mi 805 km Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this scheduled oil change is per formed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Odometer Trip Odometer in the Instrument Cluster Description section of this manual Diesel Models without Diesel Particulate Filter DPF NOTE Proper operation of four wheel drive ve hicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any dif ference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case The tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear Tt Change the engine oil and engine oil filter at every 6 250 miles 10 000 km or 6 months if using your vehicle under any of the following severe duty conditions e Stop and go driving e Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e Trailer towing e Taxi police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert operation At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading
151. dle speed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 156 WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could acceler ate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position The key can only be re moved from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis sion Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the igni tion switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manu
152. dlights within 45 sec onds The delay interval begins when you turn off the headlights Only the headlights will illu minate during this time f you turn the headlights position lights or the ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay f you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle nformation Center EVIC For details refer to Delay Turning Headlights Off under Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Lights On Reminder If the headlights or position lights are on after the ignition is turned to the LOCK position a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Front Fog Lights To activate the front fog lights turn on FO the position lights or the headlights and pull out on the end of the multi function lever 031407692 Front Fog Light Control Rear Fog Lights To activate the rear fog lights turn on Q the front position lights or the head lights pull out the end of the multi function lever and rotate the lever to the last detent Headlight Leveling System This system allows the driver to maintain proper headlight beam position with the road surface regardless of vehicle load The headlight level ing switch is located
153. doors press and release the window LOCKOUT button setting it in the down position To enable the window controls press and release the window LOCK OUT button again setting it in the up position Window Lockout Button Reset It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the Auto Up feature To do so per form the following procedure 1 Pull the window switch up to close window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof or Sky Slider if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffet ing occurs with the sunroof or Sky Slider open adjust the sunroof or Sky Slider open ing to minimize the buffeting or open any win dow LIFTGATE To open the liftgate pull up Squeeze on the handle and lift 022205927 Liftgate Release NOTE Use the powe
154. down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism 32 022607497 1 Downward Movement 2 Rearward Movement 022607757 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 022607494 AHR In Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems reset ting the head restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified special ist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h NOTE e BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer e Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert If BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt
155. e Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 258 50 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OCCO O C O C O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tf Rotate tires Replace the engine air filter element Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 259 62 500 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air filter element Drain the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing OCO CO C O C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 260
156. e 4 button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Recognition VR system under stands two types of commands Universal com mands are available at all times Local com mands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recognition VR system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is differ ent than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the ih button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following com mands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the following
157. e tween cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph 16 km h NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the windshield wiper washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then re sume the intermittent interval previously se lected If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the wind shield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during windshield washer use Headlights with Wipers When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature Mist Feature Push downward on the windshield wiper washer control le
158. e to assure they have not been contaminated Contaminated fluids and lubricants milky foamy in appearance should be flushed changed as soon as pos sible to prevent component damage Driving In Snow Mud and Sand In heavy snow when pulling a load or for additional control at slower speeds shift the transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if necessary Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in this section Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control Hill Climbing NOTE Before attempting to climb a hill determine the conditions at the crest and or on the other side Before climbing a steep hill shift the trans mission to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW Use first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brakes Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression braking of the engine to help regulate your speed If the brakes are required to contro vehicle speed apply them lightly and avoid ocking or skidding the tires WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to t
159. e gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is re fueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer or a CHECK GASCAP message will be displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened Refer to Onboard Diagnostic Sys tem OBD II in Section 7 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the re quirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exc
160. e headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your head lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds before activating the flash to pass function again Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instru ment panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odom eter and radio when the parking lights or head lights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407691 Dimmer Control Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console and above the rear doors by the grab handles Each light is turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is op
161. e performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is necessary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the LOCK or ACC position to the ON position The light should turn on for approximately two sec onds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not turn on have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 32 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for ap proximately 16 seconds when the e vehicle security system is arming and then flash slowly when the System is armed The light will also turn on for about three seconds when the igni
162. e styl ing and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles Before you start to drive this vehicle read this Owner s Manual and all the supplements Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering and transmission shifting Learn how your ve hicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience but as in driving any vehicle take it easy as you begin Always observe local laws wherever you drive NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient refer ence and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Operating this vehicle at excessive speeds or while intoxicated may result in loss of control collision with other vehicles or objects going off the road or overturning any of which may lead to serious injury or death Also failure to use seat belts subjects the driver and passen gers to a greater risk of injury or death To keep your vehicle running at its best have your vehicle serviced at recommended inter vals by an authorized dealer who has the qualified personnel special tools and equip ment to perform all service The manufacturer and its distributors are vitally interested in your complete satisfaction with this vehicle If y
163. e the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode On vehicles equipped with a Base Cluster press and release it once again to display the outside temperature On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster press and release it once again to display the outside temperature and compass heading in the screen below the speedometer Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped for details Resetting the Trip Odometer Display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approximately two seconds until the display resets to 0 The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trio odometer 26 4WD Indicator Vehicles Equipped with Selec Trac II This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the full time 4 wheel 4wD drive auto mode In this mode the system operates with a normal torque split of 42 front axle and 58 rear axle It can redirect up to 100 of torque to the front or rear axle if necessary 27 Odometer Trip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the fol lowing messages will display in the odometer
164. e them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capac ity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Always use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewal flexing Consult your authorized dealer for ra dial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emer gency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled at the irst opportunity WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tempo rary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specif
165. e to release the spring tension and then pull it outward 2 Disconnect the bulb from the harness con nector and then connect the replacement bulb 3 Engage the right hook of the side repeater lamp into the sheet metal note correct orienta tion of lettering on lens 4 Rotate the side repeater lamp in place until the left side engages you will hear a light click Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal Back Up and Fog Lamps 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the screws that fasten the taillamp housing to the vehicle 3 Pull the taillamp housing straight back to separate it from the vehicle 4 Disconnect the electrical connector 5 Remove the two screws that fasten the back plate to the taillamp housing 6 Separate the back plate from the taillamp housing 7 Pull the appropriate bulb s out of the back plate and insert the replacement bulb s 8 Install the back plate and screws into the taillamp housing 9 Connect the electrical connector 10 Install the taillamp housing and screws 11 Close the liftgate 237 FLUID CAPACITIES MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent U S Metric Fuel Approximate 3 7L Engine 19 5 Gallons 73 8 Liters 2 8L Diesel Engine 18 5 Gallons 70 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 3 7L Engine 5 Quarts 4 7 Liters 2 8L Diesel Engine 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 3 7L Engine 14 Quarts 13 Liters MOPAR Antifr
166. e vehicle speed must be at 0 mph 0 km h to recall memory posi tions If a recall is attempted with the vehicle speed above 0 mph 0 km h a message will display in the EVIC if equipped To recall the memory settings for driver one press MEMORY button number 1 or the UN LOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1 To recall the memory setting for driver two press MEMORY button number 2 or the UN LOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2 A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the MEMORY buttons S 1 or 2 during a recall When a recall is cancelled the driver seat will stop moving A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be se lected 86 Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle The distance the driver seat moves depends on where you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the key from the ignition switch e When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driver seat will move about 2 4 in 60 mm rearward if the driver s seat position is greater than or equal to 2 7 in 68 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position e When you remove the key from the ignition switch the driv
167. e with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should al ways be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the ve hicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK Continued 81 WARNING Continued e Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of an accident and could result in serious injury or death e Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid acci dental deployment of the Active Head Re straint ensure that all cargo is secured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is de ployed Heated Seats If Equipped This feature heats both the front driver and passenger seats The controls for the front heated seats are located on the instrument panel below the climate controls After turning 82 the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none fo
168. ear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR SE An thet ote Geo oor om aod tee Gam ooh cube eo don 30 e Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert 32 e Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped oc eas we a ate eis eh ee UE o8 33 e Energy Management Feature 33 e Seat Belts and Pregnant Women 34 e Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags 34 Child Restraint cocoa Swe ee ae eo 42 e ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS 48 e Additional Requirements For Diesel Engine IfiEqupped DC 48 SAFET TIRS ecco tn See 100 521 2211 9 48 e Transporting Passengers o oooooooo 48 Exhaust GaSe ae a sso aon TT 48 e Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle 49 e Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle ata 49 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys to your vehicle are double sided and can be used in the locks with either side up 81c0ee8f Vehicle Key The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission 1 Place the shift lever into PARK 2 Turn the key to the ACC position 3 Push the key and cylinder inward slightly and rotate the key to the LOCK position 4 Remove the key from the lock cylinder
169. eats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible Check belt fit periodically A child s squirm ing or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoul der belt under an arm or behind their back Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards The manu facturer also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you e When your child restraint is not in use se cure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do no
170. ebook e The uconnect phone will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone num ber which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phone book is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice 62 recognition and it is recommended For ex ample say Robert Smith or Robert in stead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designa tion e g Home Work Cellular or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if de sired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a sepa rate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically downloads cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebo
171. ect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts You can also press the amp button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the uconnect phone features press the o button and say uconnect Tutorial 69 Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the uconnect phone recognizing their voice com mands or numbers the uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two follow ing procedures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the iS button for five sec onds until the session begins or e Press the amp button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a ne
172. ed Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support If Equipped This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support The control lever is located on the inboard side of the seat Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support 79 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped This feature allows the front passenger seat back to fold flat for extended cargo space Some fold flat seats also have a hardback surface that you can use as a work surface when the seat is folded flat Pull up on the lever to fold down the seatback Fold Flat Passenger Seat Power Seat If Equipped The power seat switch is located on the out board side of the seat near the floor 80 Power Seat Switch For vehicles equipped with a driver s power seat use this switch to move the seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat For ve hicles equipped with a passenger power seat use this switch to move the seat forward and rearward CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat be
173. ed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific type of lower attach ment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehi cle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child re straints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System and Installing Child Re straints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt in this section for typical installation instructions Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were pro vided with the child restraint system 45 The rear seat lower anchorages o are round bars located at the rear ime of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces Latch Anchorages In addition
174. eed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equip ment permanent or temporary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in com bination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 193 WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the ve hicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force ex erted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 7 or more than 10 of the trailer load Tongue weight must not exceed the lesser of either the hitch certification rating or the trailer tongue chassis rating It should never be less than 4 of the trailer load and not less than 55 Ibs
175. eep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buck led up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle have com bination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sud den stops or collisions This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision
176. eeze Engine Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 2 8L Diesel Engine 13 Quarts 12 Liters Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 238 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPARe Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technol ogy or equivalent Engine Oil 3 7L Engine Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard Non ACEA Categories MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade SAE 5W 30 engine oil ap proved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil 3 7L Engine ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil is not available Engine Oil 2 8L Diesel Use SAE 0W 40 Diesel Engine Oils confirming to API American Petroleum Institute Quality Cl 4 without Particulate Filter or CJ 4 For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Engine Oil 2 8L Diesel Use SAE 5W 30 Die
177. efore entering the water CAUTION When driving through water do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h Always check water depth before entering as a precaution and check all fluids afterward Driving through water may cause damage that may not be covered by the new vehicle limited warranty Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle If you must drive through water try to determine the depth and the bottom condition and location of any obstacles prior to enter ing Proceed with caution and maintain a steady controlled speed less than 5 mph 8 km h in deep water to minimize wave ef fects 166 Flowing Water If the water is swift flowing and rising as in storm run off avoid crossing until the water level recedes and or the flow rate is reduced If you must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in 22 cm The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water Determine exit point s that are downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting Standing Water Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in 51 cm and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave effects Maximum speed in 20 in 51 cm of water is less than 5 mph 8 km h Maintenance After driving through deep water inspect your vehicle fluids and lubricants engine transmis sion axle transfer cas
178. ele ments Labels can be peeled off after soak ing with warm water e Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window 113 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED NOTE Roof rack and crossbars cannot be used on vehicles equipped with Skyslider The load carried on the roof when equipped with a luggage rack must not exceed 150 lbs 68 kg and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area Crossbars should always be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load re mains securely attached NOTE Crossbars are offered by MOPAR accesso ries 114 External racks do not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure that the total occupant and luggage load inside the vehicle plus the load on the luggage rack do not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity CAUTION e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately e Long loads which extend over the wind shield such as wood panels or surfboards should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle e Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the load Continued CAUTION Cont
179. ellow Seat if equipped Yellow ment Node CCN Stop Light Wireless Control CHMSL pa M M2 20 Amp Trailer Lighting ultitunction Yellow if Soup Control Switch M3 20 Amp Frt Rr Axle Lock Yellow ers if equipped 233 234 Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description Mini Description ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M14 20 Amp Trailer Tow M17 15 Amp Exterior 20 Amp Auto Shut Down Yellow BUX If Blue Lighting Left Yellow ASD 3 Equipped Front Park and 10 Amp Right Horn M15 20 Amp Multifunction Con Side Marker Left Red Hi Low Yellow trol Switch Cabin Tail and Running M23 10 Amp Left Horn Compartment License Lights Red Hi Low Node CCN M18 15 Amp Exterior M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper Steering Column Blue Lighting Right Natural if equipped Control Module Front Park and M25 20 Amp Fuel Pump SCM Rear View Side Marker Right Yellow Mirror Tire Pres Tail and Running M26 10 Amp Power Mirror sure Monitor Lights Red Switch Driver TPM ve 5 M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down Window Switch equipped en Natural ASD 1 and 2 m sor if equipped M20 15 Amp Interior Lighting Mer di ci Transfer Case Blue Steering Wheel Module WCM Module Switches if Steering Column if equipped equipped Switch Lock Mi6 10 Amp Occupant Re
180. ened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned completely upward to the second detent Cargo Light The cargo light is mounted in the headliner above the rear cargo area This light will turn on when you open the liftgate or any door or if you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmit ter or rotate the dimmer control on the multi function lever completely upward to the second detent Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery the overhead lights turn off in about 10 minutes if the door is left open the lights are left in Dome On position or if the lamps are switched on and left on and the key is not in the ignition WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a Switch located at the end of the lever For information on using the rear window wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in this section 036407502 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever 91 Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for high speed wiper operation 031507503 Front Wiper Control NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the park position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while they are opera
181. engers who should sit in seats and use seat belts WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passen gers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guide lines for loading your vehicle e Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left door center pillar e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improp erly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to sway e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the cargo area behind the top of the rear seats The cover when extended covers the cargo area to keep items out of sight Notches in the trim panels near the liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in use You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to make m
182. enting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually How ever the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sun roof is open 104 Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sun roof open adjust the sunroof opening to mini mize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles e
183. eplace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 247 67 500 Miles 108 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 1 Rotate tires 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 75 000 Miles 120 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt
184. eployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled per son contact the customer center Phone num bers are provided under If You Need Assis tance in Section 9 WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel e The SABIC airbags need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors sig nals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC airbags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on sever ity and type of impac
185. er designs may result in unsatisfac tory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be in spected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper mainte nance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the BRAKE warning light is illuminated Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid res ervoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricant
186. er seat will move to a position 0 3 in 8 mm forward of the rear stop if the drivers seat position is between 0 9 in and 2 7 in 23 mm and 68 mm forward of the rear stop The seat will return to its previously set position when you insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it out of the LOCK position The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver s seat position is less than 0 9 in 23 mm forward of the rear stop At this position there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry Each stored memory setting will have an asso ciated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position NOTE The Easy Entry Easy Exit feature can be turned on or off through the programmable features in the EVIC For details refer to Automatically Move Seat Back on Exit under Personal Settings Customer Pro grammable Features under Electronic Ve hicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel Hood Release 2 Outside of the vehicle locate the safety latch lever between the grille and hood open ing left of center when facing hood Push the safety latch lever to the right and then raise the hood 031307179 Underhood Safety Latch Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position P
187. erside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposi tioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disas semble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service i
188. ert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Discon nect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap Route the tether strap under the headrest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat WARNING e An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e Child Restraint Anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passen ger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts 47 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period
189. f for specific reasons as noted Refer to Partial Off and to Full Off for additional information Partial Off 2WD Vehicles amp 4WD Vehicles in 2WD amp 4WD High Range The Partial Off mode is intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode raises the threshold for TCS and ESP activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows The ESP OFF button is located in the lower switch bank below the climate Control To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily depress the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator light will illuminate To turn the ESP on again momentarily depress the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator light will turn off This will restore the normal ESP On mode of op eration ESP Off Button NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driv ing with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desir able to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF but ton Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing the ESP OFF but ton This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 177 Full Off 4WD Vehicles in 4WD High And 4WD Low Range The Full Off mode is intended for off highway and off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to
190. f the steering column Tilt Steering Control Handle To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lock the steering column in position pull the control handle upward until it is fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driv ing Adjusting the steering column while driv ing or driving with the steering column un locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your vehicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Contro takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h for gas engines and 31 mph 50 km h for diesel engines The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel Ww CANCEL _ A RESUME ACCEL CRUISE oNorr 4 Y SET DeceEL 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simulta neously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by push ing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push
191. f your defroster is inoper able Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exte rior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and lock ing Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight park ing for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately 49 50 e Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone sas eels se os eas cores e VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED e Voice Recognition VR System Operation Commands ia cca aw ev ewe ea eee o VOCE o SEATS a a a eere e STE E e Manual Front Seat Adjustments e Recliner Adjustment 1 aa a 9 s e Lumbar Support If Equipped e Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped e Power Seat If Equipped lt lt e Adjusting Active Head Restrai
192. fant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufac turer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint e A rearward facing infant restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride orward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also 44 held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil dren in this section Hu mm The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are Still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster S
193. g If this occurs remove the obstruction and use the switch again to close the Sky Slider o gt 3 WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the Sky Slider is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the Sky Slider before clos ing Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the per ception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the Sky Slider in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffet ing If the buffeting occurs with the Sky Slider open adjust the Sky Slider opening to mini mize the buffeting or open any window Sky Slider Maintenance Refer to Sky Slider Top Care under Main taining Your Vehicle in Section 7 of this manual ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET Your vehicle is equipped with a fused 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlet This power outlet is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls It has power available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position Front Power Outlet Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug into the outlet for use to ensure proper operation NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do n
194. g may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymna sium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a nor mal by product of the process that gener ates the non toxic gas used for airbag infla tion These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instructions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint
195. ge select TOW HAUL mode if equipped or a lower gear range NOTE Using the TOW HAUL button 3 7L Engine or selecting a lower gear using the Elec tronic Range Select ERS feature 2 8L Die sel Engine while operating the vehicle un der heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking 200 The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Maintenance Sched ules in Section 8 of this manual for the proper maintenance intervals TOW HAUL If Equipped To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating select TOW HAUL when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Transmission Shifting in this section Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you expe rience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating take the following actions City Driving When stopped for short periods of time shift the transmissi
196. ge supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substi tute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Continued 157 WARNING Continued e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal e Never leave children in a vehicle unat tended This is dangerous for several rea sons The child or others could be injured A child could operate the windows or other electronic controls or move the vehicle REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle rearward Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running 158 The engine may be started in this range Set the parki
197. ghtly to the left to disengage it SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the en gine 13 NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning the igni tion switch ON the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the elec tronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon
198. go 109 LOCKS 4 s ace d hs WES EAA es 20 Auto Unlocks 22 4245 246 894 5 21 Automatic Door 21 Child Protection 22 DOOP dri ous og e tene eae Shs ek 20 Power Door 20 Steering Wheel 13 Low Tire Pressure System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH imi us tn mte de d ed 45 Lubrication Body 220 Luggage Carrier 114 Lumbar Support 79 aintenance Free Battery 218 aintenance Procedures 215 aintenance Schedule 242 255 Diesel iia cds BS tok cd 255 aintenance Sunroof 104 alfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 120 anual Transmission 154 226 Fluid Level Check 226 Lubricant Selection 226 240 Shift Speeds 155 arker Lights Side 236 aster Cylinder Brakes 225 emory Feature Memory Seat 84 emory Seat o o o o o o o 84 emory Seats and Radio 84 ethanol cidos wate eee ee ee ae 190 ethanol FUSI amp ids oem Boe 190 ini Trip Computer 130 MIOS o A a Be e 57 Automatic Dimming 57 Electric Powered 58 Electric Remote 58 Healed cs ra carrot dts 58 Outside 644 deu radar as 57 Rearview 2 57 Vanity 2 aeuo Se Se ek S E SS 58 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Monitor Tire Pressure
199. gs have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and the trim covering the side airbags is labeled SRS AIRBAG 8192b898 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Label Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light Driver Front Airbag Front Passenger Airbag e Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Re straint for Driver and Front Passenger e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Cur tains SABIC if equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel e Knee Impact Bolsters e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multi stage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the se verity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the impa
200. h plate into the buckle until you hear a click WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you e A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snug e A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increas ing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision Continued WARNING Continued e A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used to gether 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the ap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the atch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision WARNING e A lap belt worn too high can
201. he front of the vehicle NOTE During operation any movement of the Sky Slider switch will stop the Sky Slider roof Closing the Sky Slider Using Automatic Mode Press and release the button in the center of the switch and the Sky Slider will close automati cally from any position Using Operator Mode If the Sky Slider is open from the front press the switch forward and hold it the Sky Slider will move forward Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider travel at any point If the Sky Slider is open from the rear press the switch rearward and hold it and the Sky Slider will move rearward Release the switch to stop the Sky Slider travel at any point Manual Override The Sky Slider drive motors are mounted to the roof above the cargo lamp In the event that your vehicle losses battery power you can ose the Sky Slider by turning the drive gears in the appropriate motor with a 6 mm len wrench To do so you must first remove the cargo lamp from the headliner Then insert the wrench into the Allen shaped hole in the appropriate motor and turn the wrench clock wise until the top closes completely The left motor facing forward will close the top when it is open from the rear of the vehicle The right otor will close the top when it is open from the front of the vehicle Anti Pinch Protect Feature The Sky Slider will retract automatically if it detects an obstruction while closin
202. he proper tools to ensure that the fluid level is set properly Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmis sion performance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Flu ids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid 226 CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift qual ity and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur ers recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks The use of transmission sealers should be avoided as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis sion as the chemicals can damage your trans mission components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission The clutch hydraulic system is
203. he top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE gear carefully Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake Remember never drive diagonally across a hill drive straight up or down f the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the front wheels slowly left and right This may provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide traction to complete the climb Traction Downhill Shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case to 4WD LOW range Let the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag This will permit you to control the vehicle speed and direction When descending mountains or hills repeated braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking control Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is always a good idea to check for damage That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle Check tires body structure steer ing suspension and exhaust system for
204. he vehicle from a complete stop while on an incline If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate e The vehicle must be stopped e The vehicle must be on a 7 or greater incline The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in for ward gear vehicle backing uphill is in RE VERSE gear For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission the HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK For vehicles equipped with a manual trans mission the HSA will work in REVERSE gear NEUTRAL and all forward gears 173 WARNING There may be situations where the HSA Hill Start Assist will not activate and slight rolling may occur such as on minor hills i e less than 7 or with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement It is always the driver s responsibility to be attentive to dis tance to other vehicles people and objects and most importantly brake operation to en
205. hes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING ESP Electronic Stability Program cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from act ing on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi tions ESP cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skill ful driver can prevent accidents The capabili ties of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man ner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Depending upon model and mode of opera tion the ESP system has up to three operating modes ESP On Partial Off and Full Off ESP On 2WD Vehicles amp 4WD Vehicles in 2WD amp 4WD High Range This is the normal operating mode for ESP when operating a 2WD vehicle It is also the normal mode for operating a 4WD vehicle in 2WD or 4WD high range The ESP system will be in ESP On mode whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted out of 4WD low range This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or Full Of
206. hicle Under these conditions you will ob serve a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered nor mal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system 168 This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be ob tained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will in crease the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is sus pected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as anticipated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can dam age your power steering c
207. ht turns off approximately one second After the NEU TRAL button is released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch 8 Start the engine 9 Shift the transmission into DRIVE to verify that the transfer case has engaged 10 Set the parking brake 11 Shift the transmission into PARK NOTE Steps 1 through 6 are requirements for shifting the transfer case If these require ments are not met prior to pressing the NEUTRAL selection button or while the shift attempt is in process then all of the mode position indicator lights will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is re leased The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be oper able If the ignition switch in not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system an
208. ically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Dam age to the vehicle may result Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice condi tions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equip ment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 181 CAUTION Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be fol lowed to balance tire wear
209. id The fluid reservoir in the engine compartment should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent antifreeze not radiator anti freeze Operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or work ing around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly main tained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the under side or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or misposi tioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will de stroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause seri ous damage to the engine Under normal operating conditions the cata y
210. ile e The Recall Memory with Remote Key Un lock feature can be turned on and off through the EVIC if equipped For details refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory Your Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one of two pre programmed memory profiles with a press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To program your RKE transmitters perform the following 1 Remove the key from the ignition 2 Select the desired memory profile 1 or 2 3 Press and release the SET button on the memory switch then within five seconds press and release the side of the rocker switch la beled 1 or 2 accordingly Memory Profile Set 1 or 2 will display in the EVIC if equipped 4 Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter within 10 seconds NOTE Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to the memory setting by pressing the SET button followed by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4 above Memory Position Recall NOTE e For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK a message will display in the EVIC if equipped 85 e For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission th
211. ill display in place of four tire pressure values Upon the next ignition key cycle the TPMS will no longer chime or turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light or display the text message in the EVIC However the graphic will still display To reactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with those equipped with TPM Sensors Then drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 190 25 km h The TPMS will chime the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM text message and the graphic will display tire pressure values to show that the TPMS is receiving sensor data FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3 7L Engine Your vehicle is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality un leaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle
212. increase the risk of injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug Continued WARNING Continued e A twisted belt can t do its job as well Ina collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt Removing Slack From Belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disas semble or modify the system Seat belt as semblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage n the front seating positions the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to posi tion the belt away from your neck Press the release b
213. inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags de pending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by them selves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the win dow The airbag inflates in about 30 millisec onds about one quarter of the time it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag i
214. ing clockwise to lock it in place 7 Close the hood Front Turn Signal Lamp 1 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right to access the left front turn signal Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left to access the right front turn signal 2 Remove three push pins from the wheel well liner 3 Gently flex the wheel well liner forward to access the bulb 4 Rotate the bulb s socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the turn signal housing 5 Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb 6 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the turn signal housing and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place 7 Reposition the wheel well liner and install the push pins Front Fog Lamp 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the bulb 3 Rotate the bulb s socket counterclockwise and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the fog lamp housing 4 Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the replacement bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 5 Install the bulb and socket assembly into the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector clockwise to lock it in place 6 Close the hood Side Repeater Lamp 1 Push the side repeater lens to one sid
215. ing of the top will enhance its life and appearance and make successive cleaning easier Do not subject the 227 top to excessive heat Frequently vacuum the top and tracks Periodically wipe dust and dirt from the top and inside of the tracks by hand with an alcohol dampened cloth Washing Hand washing or an automatic car wash with a soft cloth system is preferred CAUTION Avoid pointing a high pressure hand held spray wand directly at the sides of the top as this can damage the seal and force water past the weather strips General Cleaning Careful vacuuming of the top before washing is helpful in removing dust and other foreign particles If hand washing e Wash in partial shade instead of direct sun e Wet the entire vehicle before washing the top 228 Wash the top with a soft natural bristle scrub brush and a mild soap solution such as liquid dish washing soap Do not use deter gent Scrub in all directions covering an area of about two square feet at a time Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the entire vehicle with water to remove all soap and dirt from the top fabric and to prevent streaking on painted and chrome surfaces Allow the top to dry before opening Vacu uming the top with a wet dry shop vacuum will decrease the tops drying time ensure removal of all dirt and delete streaks in the material Multiple cleanings may be necessary to re move stubborn stains If stains persist co
216. ins on vehicles equipped e Do not exceed 45 mph 72 km h with tires other than P225 75R16 or smaller tires There may not be adequate clear ance for the chains and you are risking structural or body damage to your vehicle Because of limited chain clearance be tween tires and other suspension compo nents it is important that only chains in good condition are used Broken chains can cause serious vehicle damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could suggest chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 1 2 mile 0 8 km Continued CAUTION Continued Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle e Use on Rear Wheels only e Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s in structions on method of installation oper ating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufac turer These cautions apply to all chain traction de vices including link and cable radial chains TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reaso
217. ins the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the tempera ture you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Tempera ture Control knob Once the comfort level is se lected the system will maintain that level auto matically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air condition ing the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function auto matically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake The recommended setting for maximum com fort is 72 F 22 C for the average person however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not nec essary e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser
218. intenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 1 Rotate tires 1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 2 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 142 500 Miles 228 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tt J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 253 OCOC O C O C O oo 150 000 Miles 240 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi
219. inued e Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward loads This is espe cially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle WARNING Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in personal injury or prop erty damage Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 117 SINSIRUMENHCEUSTERS TC 118 e INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 119 e ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IEJEQUIPPED tao ro SORT SH oe 128 e Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays 129 e OlliCchange Required a m nean ana 130 Trip Functions a o es s e ESO UE ER 130 e Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If EU rc 131 e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 134 es SOUND SYSTEMS a TENE ENSE 136 e REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED 136 e Right Hand Switch Functions 137 e Left Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation 137 ls 116 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040106636 1 Air Outlet 4 Radio 7 Power Outlet 2 Instrument Cluste
220. ion may not shift into OVERDRIVE and will automatically select the most desirable gear for operation at this temperature Normal operation will resume when the transmission fluid tem perature has risen to a suitable level Refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch later in this section During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on en gine and transmission temperature This feature improves the warm up time of the engine and transmission During cold temperature operation the transmission may not downshift from sec ond gear into first gear after the initial first to second gear upshift Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnor mal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Trans mission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the key to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the engine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the trans mission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEU TRAL will continue to operate Only second gear
221. ion switch to the LOCK posi tion 130 NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indica tor system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following information e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or ve hicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change
222. ipers 99 Car Washes 229 Computer Trip Travel 130 Diagnostic System Onboard 215 Carbon Monoxide Warning 48 COnSOlE iu ace ag aed a 109 Diesel Engine Maintenance Cul ae 255 Cargo Area Cover 111 Console Floor 109 Diesel Fuel 192 Cargo Area Features 109 Cool Down Turbo 153 Diesel Fuel Requirements 192 Cargo Compartment 109 Cooling System 0 222 Dimmer Switch Headlight 90 ONE 5 ona eng Gees Ro Eee ede 91 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 223 Dipsticks Cargo Light ius pew ges 91 Coolant Capacity 238 Oil Engine 2 2 ee 216 Cargo Load Floor 109 Coolant Level 224 Power Steering oaa 168 Cargo Tie Downs 110 Disposal of Used Coolant 224 Disposal Cellular Phone 59 Drain Flush and Refill 222 Engine Ol sss 217 Changing A Flat Tire 205 Inspection sso s 222 Used Coolant Antifreeze 224 Charging System Light 121 Points to Remember 224 Door Loeks 2 20 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 48 Pressure Cap 223 Door Locks Automatic 91 Checks Safety 48 Selection of Coolant Driving A 165 Child Restraint 42 43 45 46 Antifreeze 222 238 239 OffPavement
223. is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the ma neuver that caused the ESP activation TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Safety WARNING e Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents e Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over heating and tire failure Continued WARNING Continued e Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure e Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems You could lose control of your vehicle e Over inflated or under inflated tires can af fect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure Economy mproper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption
224. is programmed to that particular vehicle A valid key will disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm an invalid key will allow the engine to run for two seconds then stop NOTE The intrusion sensor motion detector ac tively monitors your vehicle every time you arm the security alarm If you prefer you can turn off the intrusion sensor when arming the security alarm To disable the intrusion sensor activate the LOCK request three times using the RKE trans mitter during the pre arming period lamp flash ing quickly The intrusion sensor will automati cally be enabled the next time the security alarm is set To Disarm the System 1 Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter 2 Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry Key will disarm the security alarm A valid key is one that is programmed to that particular vehicle A valid key will disarm the security alarm an invalid key will allow the engine to run for two seconds then stop NOTE e Battery disconnects will not disarm the security alarm system e Using the key in the door lock cylinder will only unlock the deadbolt locks e Once the security alarm is set and the locks are activated the only way to open the doors is with the unlock button on the RKE transmitter using the Sentry Key in the ignition switch or using the key in the door lock cylinder This feature deacti vates the door lock plungers and door handles If the security alarm has been triggered the Vehic
225. l lowed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again f the engine is flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs con tinue cranking up to 15 seconds with the ac celerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accel erator pedal held to the floor repeat the Nor mal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather pro cedures With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have fol lowed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather procedures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15
226. l Lens Cleaning 231 ntegrated Power Module Fuses 232 nterior Appearance Care 230 nterior Lighting sau ix komen 87 ntermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 92 ntrod ctl n x s mae or es xo 4 Jack Eocati n e xc Res 205 Jack Operation 205 206 Jacking Instructions 206 Jump Starting 208 Key Programming 14 Key Replacement 14 Key Sentry Immobilizer 13 Key In Reminder 13 Keyless Entry System 17 KEYS uscar Mad ce hem SIE de ta ci 12 282 Lane Change and Turn Signals 90 Lap Shoulder Belts 27 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for GHIA tes gk seks a cas x ad EUR 45 LAtCheS lt p eo ges 49 FOOG ud ete on ow Rare Gee 87 Lead Free Gasoline 190 Leaks Fluid 2 uie Bde 49 Leveling Headlight 89 Life Ot Mires iu le la ee aee 182 Liftgate ios aos See he Se ROS os 25 Liftgate Flipper Glass 26 Light Bulbs 0 49 235 LOS iun Dacia tos y ed dtu 49 87 ADAG PPP 40 49 127 Anti Lock Warning 122 Automatic Headlights 88 Back UD 22000 bugs a hee E 237 Battery Saver illis 91 Brake Assist Warning 122 178 Brake Warming less 126 Bulb Replacement 235 236 CADA a be em eed ee Gs e 91 Cruises X33 dq ato dd 126 Dimmer Switch Headlight 87 90 Electronic Stability Program
227. l plug 1 then the drain plug 2 Recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill plugs is 15 25 ft Ibs 20 34 N m CAUTION Do not over tighten the plugs You could dam age them and cause a leak Lubricant Selection Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the fluid becomes contaminated with water Change the fluid immediately if contaminated with water Front Rear Axle Fluid Fluid Level Check The lubricant level should be at bottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Lubricant Selection Use only manufacturer s recommended lubri cant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the lubri cant installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Lubricant changes are not necessary unless the lubricant becomes contaminated with water Change the lubricant immediately if contaminated with wa ter Sky Slider Top Care Immediate removal of any contaminant is rec ommended Regular wash
228. lace the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the underside of the hood s Hood Prop Rod Hole Location CAUTION To prevent possible damage e Before closing hood make sure the hood prop rod is fully seated into its storage retaining clips Lower the hood to approximately 6 in 15 2 cm above the closed position and drop the hood to latch it e Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warn ing could result in serious injury or death LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever located on the left side of the steering column controls the operation of the headlights position lights turn signal lights 87 instrument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights if equipped 031407689 Multifunction Lever Headlights and Front Position Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for position light operation Turn the end of the lever to the second detent for headlight operation 88 031407690 Headlight Switch Automatic Headlights This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on turn the end of the multi
229. ld damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage 210 WARNING Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow eyes Tow straps and chains may break caus ing serious injury TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Four Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends flatbed towing with all four wheels OFF the ground If a flatbed is not available the vehicle must be towed with all four wheels ON the ground the transfer case in neutral and the transmission in PARK automatic transmission or in gear manual transmission NOTE See Recreational Towing in section 5 for the proper procedures CAUTION Towing a four wheel drive vehicle with only two wheels on the ground whether front wheels are raised or rear wheels is NOT permitted and can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 212 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 7L y W 071007127 1 Air Cleaner Filter 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Engine Oil Dipstick 7 Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Integrated Power Module 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Battery 213 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 8L DIESEL 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Fuel Water Separator 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 Integrated Power Module 5 Battery
230. le Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions 12 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the elec trical charging system The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s electrical devices such as the Fog Lights or Rear Defroster If the light remains on it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem See your local authorized dealer to obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in section 6 of this manual 13 Oil Pressure Warning Light Qu This light shows low engine oil pres sure The light will turn on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the LOCK or ACC position to the ON position The light will turn off after the engine is started If the light does not turn on during starting have the system checked by an au thorized dealer If the light turns on and remains on while driving safely bring the vehicle to a stop and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED This light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the proper procedure 121 14 Anti Lock Brake ABS Warning Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS This light will
231. le Security Light will flash twice every two seconds Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override The security alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to un lock the vehicle or open a door This feature also turns on the approach lighting if equipped For details refer to Illumination Approach under Personal Settings Cus tomer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 The interior lights will fade to off after approxi mately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON NOTE e The Illuminated Entry system will not op erate the interior lights if the dimmer con trol is in the extreme downward position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or open the liftgate flip up window from distances up to approximately 30 ft 9 m using a hand held Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter with Integrated Key The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system However the line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects when using the RKE transmitter NOTE Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on the RKE transmitter 8 c0ee8f RKE Transmitter wi
232. lectronic Range Select ERS Operation The Electronic Range Select ERS shift control allows you to move the shift lever left or right when the shift lever is in the DRIVE position allowing the selection of the desired top gear For example if the driver shifts the transmission into third gear the transmission will never shift above third gear but can shift down to second gear or first gear when needed WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid Screen Display 1 2 3 4 D Actual Gear s 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 Allowed NOTE To select the proper gear position for maxi mum deceleration engine braking move the shift lever to the left D and hold it there The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled fifth gear OVER DRIVE The transmission will automatically shift from fourth gear to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e the engine coolant has reached normal op erating temperature e the vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the transmission has reached normal oper ating temperature NOTE If the vehicle is started in extremely cold temperatures the transmiss
233. leet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 251 OOC OO C O C O O C 120 000 Miles 192 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tf Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables 3 7L Engine Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Replace the accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 252 127 500 Miles 204 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter fj J Rotate tires 135 000 Miles 216 000 km or 108 Months Ma
234. ll sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm PREMIUM VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Premium Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the doors hood latch liftgate and ignition switch for unauthorized operation 15 If something triggers the security alarm the audible alert will sound for 30 seconds and flash the lights for 60 seconds If the triggering device is not deactivated the audible alert will sound again after a five second delay for an other 30 seconds If the trigger remains present this cycle will repeat for up to five minutes If the intrusion sensor is enabled the security alarm will trigger the audible alert for 29 sec onds When this portion of the alarm is set movement inside the vehicle will trigger the Vehicle Security Alarm To Arm the System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for 16 seconds This shows that the security alarm is pre arming After 16 seconds the locks will activate and the Vehicle Security Light will continue to flash 16 slowly This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm system is fully armed Vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immo bilizer system can be safely started with a valid key A valid key is one that
235. located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fas cia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning per formance Blower Control For full automatic op eration or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to AUTO posi tion In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be in dividual selected In off position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Pre ferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for de tails 141 142 Automatic Temperature Control Operation The system will Operation How Blower Control Mode Control Air Temperature Control Air Recirculation Control A C Operation Mode Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set mode knob to any desired ai
236. lowing features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the 4 button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the to button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only an swer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the e button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone nu
237. lt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Adjusting Active Head Restraints Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact The Active Head Restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 030907652 Adjusted Head Restraint To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint on some models you may need to press the push button To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint 030907490 Push Button For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head 022607494 Active Head Restraint Normal Position un Active Head Restraint Tilted 030907533 NOTE e The head restraints should only be re moved by qualified technicians for ser vice purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your au thorized dealer e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint refer to Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR under Occupant Restraints in Section 2 WARNING e Driving a vehicl
238. m Indicator This indicator shows that the head lights are on High beam Pull the Mul tifunction Control Lever on the left side of the steering column toward you to switch to Low beam 8 Wait To Start Light Diesel Only This light will illuminate when the igni tion switch is first turned to the ON position Wait until the light turns off before starting the vehicle Refer to Starting Procedures in Section 5 of this manual 9 Speedometer Shows the vehicle speed 10 Turn Signal Indicator The left or right arrow will flash in unison with the corresponding front and rear turn signal lights when the turn signal switch is operated NOTE e A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for a defective outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate TCS Indicator Light The yellow ESP indicator light in the speedometer area illuminates should go out with the engine run ning The ESP TCS Indicator Light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle 11 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System with the key in the ignition switch turned to the ON RUN position It traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes as possib
239. m infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter 180 Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be in creased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pres sure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintain ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor tant Increased tire pressure and reduced ve hicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle operation Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle at or above maximum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could caus
240. may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No CargoLamp WL212 2 Overhead Console Lamp PLW214 2A Reading Lamp WL212 2 235 LIGHT BULBS Exterior Bulb No Headlamp 9008 H4 Front Park Turn Signal Lamp 3757AK Front Position Lamp W5W Side RepeaterLamp 168 Back Up Lamp 3157K Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL LED serviced at authorized dealer Front Fog Lamp H10 9145 License PlateLamp 168 Rear Tail Stop 3157K Rear Turn Signal Lamp 3757AK BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamp 1 Open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlamp housing to access the headlamp bulb lock ring 236 3 Firmly grasp the lock ring and rotate it counterclockwise to unlock it 4 Remove the bulb and connector assembly from the headlamp housing 5 Disconnect the bulb from the electrical con nector and then connect the replacement bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate the lock r
241. mber or phone book entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls To combine two calls refer to Conference Call Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the q button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the to button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the 4 button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one Call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the o button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the e but ton while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Mak ing a Second Call While Current Call in Progress After the second call has estab lished press and hold the q button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is
242. ments vary according to geographic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly cor rosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to air borne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or re moval of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equivalent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e f insects tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax or equivalent to re move road film stains and to protect you
243. mina 5 Right Rear Posi Brown 13 Return for Contact White tion device shall be connected such that no tion Side Marker Pin 9 light of the device has a common connection Lights and Rear Note The allocation pin 12 has been with both pins 5 and 7 Registration Plate changed from Coding for coupled Trailer to Illumination Reserve for Future Allocation Device The three return circuits shall not be con 6 Stop Lights Red nected electrically in the trailer 7 Left Rear Position Black The rear position registration plate illumina Side Marker tion device shall be connected such that no Lights and Rear light of the device has a common connection Registration Plate with both pins 5 and 7 bua Towing Tips a Before setting out on a trip practice turning da 8 Reverse lights Red Black stopping and backing the aller in an Bed 13 Pin Connector 9 Permanent Power Brown away from heavy traffic Supply 12V White 199 Manual Transmission If Equipped If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Additionally when starting on a steep grade greater than 10 4 LO should be used to avoid excessive clutch slippage The vehicle should be returned to either 2WD or 4 AUTO mode once on level ground Automatic Transmission If Equipped The DRIVE range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this ran
244. mmable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the bat tery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related acces sories contain lead and lead compounds Wash your hands after handling the battery CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked positive and negative and are identified on the battery case Also if a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air condi tioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air con ditioning system as the chemicals can dam age your air conditioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri cants approved by the man
245. months Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect exhaust system Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 25 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OCCO O C O C O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tf Rotate tires Replace the engine air filter element Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 257 37 500 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tT Rotate tires Replace the engine air filter element Drain the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the manual transmission fluid add if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Replace the accessory drive belt OCOC O C O C O Odometer Reading Dat
246. n tact your local authorized dealership for fur ther suggestions CAUTION Never use an abrasive type cleaner or bleaches Cleaners should not contain sili cones organic solvents petroleum distillates or plasticizers Always wait until the top is thoroughly dry before opening it Additional Cleaning Procedure For additional cleaning assistance in removing stubborn stains apply MOPAR Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent to the complete stain extending 2 in 50 mm beyond the stain With a soft bristle brush scrub in all directions over the stain Avoid heavy scrubbing Rinse the area with warm water If the stain is still apparent repeat the cleaning procedure When the stain is no longer showing rinse the complete top with warm water Let the top dry before opening it Protection For appearance purposes you may wish to protect the acrylic cloth top periodically A fabric protectant such as Scotchguard is sug gested The top should be clean and dry before application of the protectant CAUTION Avoid getting Scotchguard on the surround ing weather strips moldings paint or glass Damage to these items might occur Weather Strip Care Lubricate the weather strips periodically with OPAR Weather Strip Lubricant or equivalent to keep them soft and pliable Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care require
247. n for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires Gen eral Information for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake sys tem or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inad equate braking and possible personal injury 197 When towing a trailer equipped with a hy draulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 450 kg and required for trailers in excess of 1 653 Ibs 750 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 450 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehi cle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Continued 198 WARNING Continued e Towing any trailer will increase your stop ping distance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure
248. n Section 3 of this manual for system function and operating information To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When ON is selected the HSA system is active Refer to HSA Hill Start Assist under Elec tronic Brake Control System in Section 5 of this manual for system function and operating infor mation To make your selection press and 136 release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the turn by turn direc tions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a pro grammed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display ECO If Equipped The ECO message is located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT but ton until DN or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your Selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears SOUND SYSTEMS Refer to your Sound Systems Booklet REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are lo
249. n and take precautionary safety measures By dial ing a number with your paired Bluetooth cel lular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the uconnect phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the uconnect phone e Press the button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the e button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect
250. nd At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone refer to Compatible Phones section to learn about the phone type To complete the pairing process you will need to reference your cellular phone owner s manual The uconnect website may also pro vide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions e Press the to button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
251. nd Sy COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near p If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between and 54 In very cold weather p e if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the Y 045606725 146 148 e Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM e Hill Start Assist HSA lt lt lt lt lt lt Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped e Electronic Stability Program ESP e ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light e TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION OWMOlHESTO d Tcr e Tire Inflation Pressures lt lt lt lt e Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation e Radial PlyaTires s cs ea coama a o Compact Spare Tire If Equipped omire Spinning aa 32 0032 2029 020 122 0200 0200 exTread Wear Indicators 2 70 55 0a eee ee erri eJite OfjTire tsa pon nt oo Ga eo T Replacements o TIRECCHAINS as a Ge eos ad e TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS e TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS e Base System ee o erence a nos e Premium System If Equipped s FUEREQUIREMENTS PET eS EngneE e 150 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and asten you
252. ndations 48 Compartment 213 Coolant Antifreeze 239 Exhaust Gas Caution 48 Falls to Start ss kde xs 152 Flooded Starting 152 Fuel Requirements 190 238 Jump Starting 0 208 Oll oros air eae Ru 216 238 239 Oil Change Interval 126 130 Oil Disposal sss 217 QUES 2 03 03 5 ros epee 218 Oil Selection 216 217 238 Oil Synthetic lin 217 Overheating 204 SIGNING i o eh Bao RAs dee d 151 Temperature Gauge 124 Engine Oil Viscosity 217 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 217 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 40 Entry System Illuminated 17 Ethanol amp se be Whe bes 190 Exhaust Gas Caution 48 Exhaust System 48 220 Exterior Finish Care 229 Exterior Lights x ii a 49 Fabric Care o o 230 Filters Air Cleaner 218 Air Conditioning 145 Engine Olli smsa bs n 218 239 Finish Care less 229 Flashers Hazard Warning 204 Turn Signal 49 90 121 236 237 Flash To Pass 90 Flipper Glass Liftgate 26 Flooded Engine Starting 152 FloorConsole 109 Fluid Brake 240 Fluid Capacities 238 Fluid Leaks 49 Fluid Level Checks 227 Automatic Transmission
253. ne off immediately and call for service NOTE As the coolant temperature gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound Further over heating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H In this case the indicator will flash continuously and a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could dam age your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service 123 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 23 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge indicates engine cool ant temperature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is op erating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy traffic or when towing a trailer If the pointer rises to the H m
254. nents e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressure monitoring sensor The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire Otherwise a spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illumi nate or the chime to sound 186 Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system
255. nflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 31 2 inches 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed e Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Additional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle WARNING If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions NOTE At no time should any Supplemental Re straint System SRS component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC Mopar If a Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate im mediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean some thing is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the followin
256. nformation Center EVIC features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster 041006525 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 128 This system conveniently allows the driver to select a variety of useful information by press ing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e System Status e Vehicle information warning message dis plays e Tire Pressure Monitor System If Equipped e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass display e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e uconnect gps system screens if equipped e Audio mode display The system allows the driver to select informa tion by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel MENU Button Press and release the MENU but E ton and the mode displayed will change between Trip Functions MENU uconnect gps if equipped System Status and Personal Set tings SCROLL Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions System v Status Messages and Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside temperature FUNCTION SELECT Button Press the FUNCTION SELECT but b ton to accept a selection Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC
257. ng brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with shift lever in NEU TRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Section 5 and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in Section 6 of this manual DRIVE This range is used for most city and highway driving 2 Second This range is used for moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow Begins at a stop in low gear with auto matic upshift into second gear Will not shift into third gear 1 First This range is used for hard pulling at low Speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades Begins and stays in low gear with no upshift Provides engine compression braking at low speeds Overdrive Operation The overdrive automatic transmission contains an electronically controlled fourth gear OVER DRIVE The transmission will automatically shift from third gear into OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present e the shift lever is in DRIVE e vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h e the TOW HAUL button has not been acti vated The transmission will downshift from OVER DRIVE to DRIVE if the accelerator pedal is fully pressed at vehicle speeds above approxi mately 35 mph 56 km h When To Use TOW HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas towing a trailer carrying a heavy load etc and frequent trans mission shifting occurs press
258. nitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steer ing wheel angle and vehicle s speed are suffi cient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve hicles NOTE ERM is disabled anytime the ESP is in Full Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program for a complete explanation of the available ESP modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road conditions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to help the driver accelerate t
259. nnect phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish if so equipped e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every uconnect phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages For command translations and alternate com mands in supported languages refer to Com mand Translations Emergency Assistance If Equipped If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the o button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number NOTE e The default number is 112 The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area e If supported this number may be p
260. ns they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns 183 The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram ec 7e O Ec 055703771 Tire Rotation These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride 184 CAUTION Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be fol lowed to balance tire wear Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Remember more frequent rotation is permis sible if desired Also correct for anything caus ing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pres sure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on
261. ns in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflec tions Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Clean interior trim with a damp cloth and MO PAR Total Clean or equivalent and if neces sary follow with MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifi cally recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn Soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean leather uphol stery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur poses Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respira tory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone b
262. nsmission 157 159 Automatic 157 159 ql ce Pan Get ah as ae BOO 240 Maintenance 226 Manual ooe kee Eek ee os 154 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 19 Tread Wear Indicators 181 Trip Odometer 125 Trip Odometer Reset Button 124 Turbo Cool Down 153 Turn Signals 87 90 121 236 237 uconnect Hands Free Phone 59 Unleaded Gasoline 190 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 30 Upholstery Care 230 Vanity MIMOS o cedes esse 58 Variance Compass 132 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vehicle Storage 145 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 15 Viscosity Engine Oil 217 Voice Recognition System VR 76 Warning Flasher Hazard 204 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 119 Warning Roll Over 4 Warnings and Cautions 8 Washers Windshield 91 93 220 Water Driving Through 2 2 165 Waxing and Polishing 229 Wheel and Wheel Trim 230 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 230 Wind Buffeting 25 104 107 Window Fogging 145 WINDOWS 1 sug dow Os Sy a a eB eng 23 POWER kt kk qo een tae RC age dd 23 Windshield Defroster 49 139 143 Windshield Washers 91 98
263. nspection at 15 000 miles 24 000 km or 12 months 1 Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 15 000 miles 24 000 km or 12 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 244 22 500 Miles 36 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter t 1 Rotate tires 1 Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 30 000 Miles 48 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 0 O O O O O O O O O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tf Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 3 7L Engine Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the transfer case fluid Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order
264. nts Heated Seats If Equipped e 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat with Fold Flat Feature i e DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED e Programming the Memory Feature e Linking and Unlinking the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter to Memory e e Memory Position Recall 0 3 1 1 nets ees e Easy Entry Exit Seat Available with Memory Seat Only e TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 52 54 e Headlights with Wipers lt lt lt 93 Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped 93 TILT STEERING COLUMN a ore eee eer ans 94 e ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED 95 TOA CUA 95 e To Seta Desired Speed o o oo oo ooo o 96 OU WERSINEIG SET 96 e To Resume Speed s Rx es 96 e To Vary the Speed Setting 96 e To Accelerate for Passing een 96 e PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST IF EQUIPPED 97 eiParkSenseSiSensorsm 3 01 a 97 e ParkSense Warning Display 98 eyParkSense JBisplay n a T 98 e Enabling and Disabling ParkSense 100 e Service the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System 100 e Cleaning the ParkSense System 101 e ParkSense System Usage Precautions 101 e POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 103 e Opening Sunroof Express l l 103 e Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 103 e Closing
265. o monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to in crease fuel economy Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which elimi nates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also Calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges under ground cables railroad tracks etc 131 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu displays in the EVIC 132 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indi cator will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 36
266. of the engine compartment This is normally a re sult of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recov ery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze addi tions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concen tration at 50 HOAT engine coolant anti freeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or ob structed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever nec essary install only the correct type thermo stat Oth
267. of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or au thorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Infor mation placard located on the drivers door pillar for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended CAUTION e Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle e During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury acci dent Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident e All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer
268. ok transfer from Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically down loads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or uconnect Phonebook follow the proce dure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if sup ported begins as soon as the phone Bluetooth wireless connection is made to the uconnect phone For example after you start the vehicle e Maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone e Depending on the maximum number of en tries downloaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if available previous downloaded phonebook is available for use e Only the phonebook of the currently con nected cellular phone is accessible e Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the cellular phonebook e This downloaded phonebook cannot be ed ited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are transferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry
269. omponents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accu rate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid f necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever com pletely Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light onl
270. on into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Four Wheel Drive Models The transfer case must be shifted into NEU TRAL and the automatic transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing The NEUTRAL selection button is located at the top of the 4WD Control Switch Shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL can take place with the selec tor switch in any mode position CAUTION e Damage from improper towing is not cov ered by your new vehicle warranty Continued CAUTION Continued e The automatic transmission must be in the PARK position for recreational towing Fail ure to follow these procedures can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage e Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing e Before recreational towing perform the procedure outlined under Shifting into NEUTRAL to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL Otherwise inter nal damage will result e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully en gaging the parking brake The transfer case NE
271. onds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power win dow switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illumination Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selection press and 135 hold the RESET button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the uconnect system are confirmed To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF ap pears Park Assist System If Equipped When ON is selected the system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmis sion is inthe REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph 18 km h Refer to Rear Park Assist System i
272. onitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Section 5 of this manual Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Section 5 of this manual for more details Service Park Assist System with a single chime Oil Change Required with a single chime ECO Fuel Saver Indicator if equipped 129 Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Re quired message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next sched uled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driv ing style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message tem porarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance per form the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignit
273. ore room in the cargo area 111 To install the cover position it in the vehicle so that the flat side of the housing faces upward Then insert either the left or the right spring loaded post located on the ends of the cover housing into either of the left or the right attachment points shown Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover Then insert the spring loaded post on the opposite end of the cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle Next grab the cover handle and pull the cover toward you As the cover nears the liftgate opening guide the rear attachment posts on 112 both ends of the cover into the notches in the trim panels Then lower the cover to position the posts into the bottom of the notches and release the handle Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover WARNING In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could cause injury It could fly around in a sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting Do not store in the vehicle REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper washer is controlled by a rotary switch located on the control lever The control lever is located on the right side of the steering column 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control Rotate the s
274. ot exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 107 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet e Do not touch with wet hands e Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Continued 108 e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these intermittently and with greater caution e After the use of high power draw accesso ries or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of acces CAUTION Continued sory or accessory bracket from the plug CUPHOLDERS There a
275. ot to over speed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h e Proper operation of four wheel drive ve hicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case Tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear WARNING e You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake The trans fer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front driveshaft and rear driveshaft from the powertrain and it will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle e Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light is illuminated Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury e Since four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit You or others could be injured Shift Positions The transfer case switch is located on the center console next to the shift lever 81c357ca Transfer Case Switch 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads 4WD Auto Four
276. oth visual and audible warnings to indi cate the distance between the rear fascia bumper and the detected obstacle 98 Rear Park Assist Display ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE the warning display will turn ON indicating the system sta tus Rear Park Assist ON Rear Park Assist Disabled The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing three solid arcs and will produce a 1 2 second tone As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will change from slow to fast to continuous Slow Tone Continuous Tone The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone The following chart shows the warning display operation when the system is detecting an obstacle Fast Tone 99 WARNING DISPLAY DISTANCES DISPLAY MESSAGE OBSTACLE DISTANCE FROM ARC s AUDIBLE SIGNAL REAR CORNERS REAR CENTER Park Assist ON None None Warning Object Detected 78 7 in 200 cm 3 Solid Yes 1 2 second Warning Object Detected 39 3 in 100 cm 3 Flashing Slow Tone Warning Object Detected 27 5 in 70 cm 31 4 in 80 cm 3 Flashing Slow Tone Warning Object Detected 25 5 in 65 cm 25 5 in 65 cm 2 Flashing Fast Tone Warning Object Detected 19 7 in 50 cm 19 7 in 50 cm 2 Flashing Fast Tone Warning Object Detected 15 7 in 40 cm
277. ou encounter a service or warranty problem which is not resolved to your satisfaction discuss the matter with your autho rized dealer s management Your authorized dealer will be happy to assist you with any questions about your vehicle ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll over rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident roll over of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully AX WARNING HIGHER ROLLOVER RISK 80bfe0f0 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up IMPORTANT NOTICE ALL MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS PUBLI CATION IS BASED ON THE LATEST INFORMA TION AVAILABLE AT TIME OF PUBLICATION APPROVAL THE RIGHT IS RESERVED TO PUBLISH
278. ou start the vehicle the oil change indica tor system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 28 Cruise Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator lights when the elec CRUISE tronic speed control system is turned on 29 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 30 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for several sec onds after the ignition is turned ON as a reminder to buckle up This light will remain on as long as the seat belt remains unbuckled 31 Brake Warning Light After ignition is turned on illuminates O to indicate function check at vehicle start up Indicates parking brake is applied If the light stays on when the parking brake is off it indicates a possible brake sys tem fluid leak or low pressure level see your authorized dealer immediately The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which can change fluid level conditions The vehicle should have servic
279. our vehicle General Information The Sentry Key Immobilizer is a 433 92 MHz system It will be used in the following Euro pean countries which apply Directive 1999 5 EC Austria Belgium Czech Republic Den mark Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Luxembourg Nether lands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Russian Federation Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Yugoslavia and United Kingdom e This device may not cause harmful interfer ence e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors liftgate hood and liftgate flip up win dow for unauthorized entry and ignition for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will sound the horn intermit tently flash the headlights and taillights and flash the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will signal with the siren for 30 seconds If the triggering device is not deactivated the siren will sound again after a five second delay for another 30 seconds If the trigger remains present this cycle will repeat for up to five minutes To Arm the System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle 2 Lock the doors and liftgate by p
280. p to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS 171 WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from act ing on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road condi tions ABS cannot prevent accidents includ ing those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skill ful driver can prevent accidents The capabili ties of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man ner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability 172 A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle lf one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode or the Full Off mode
281. pen the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automati cally retract Remove the obstruction if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close 103 Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc pre vents closing and moves the sunroof in the opposite direction press the switch forward and hold This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed V
282. phic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires 4 The EVIC will display a graphic showing the tire pressure value in place of the flashing low tire pressure value The EVIC will also display a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to remind you to service the flat tire Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the com pact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next igni tion key cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will dis play a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and
283. played in the instrument cluster 101 CAUTION e ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle includ ing small obstacles Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all Obstacles located above or below the sen sors will not be detected when they are in close proximity e The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense to be able to stop in time when the obstacle is detected It is recom mended that the driver looks over his her shoulder when using ParkSense WARNING e Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Always check carefully behind your vehicle look behind you and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles obstructions and blind spots before backing up You are respon sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death 102 Continued WARNING Continued e Before using the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to ve hicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the
284. police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 254 T This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Maintenance Schedule Diesel Engine Diesel Models with Diesel Particulate Filter DPF NOTE Proper operation of four wheel drive ve hicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any dif ference in tire size can cause damage to the transfer case The tire rotation schedule should be followed to balance tire wear The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched uled maintenance A CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation con
285. properly 119 CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may re sult when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor dam age Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result Refer to Tire Inflation Pressures un der Tires General Information and to Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS in Sec tion 5 of this manual for more information 5 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light If Equipped This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Contro system If a problem is detected the light will turn on while the en gine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle wil 120 usually be drivable and not need towing how ever see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss an elevated rough idle and increased brake pedal effort and your vehicle may require towing Immediate service is required The light will turn on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check This is no
286. ps up Cargo Load Floor Loops 2 Pull the loops upward and twist them one quarter turn so that they are parallel to the slots in the storage bin cover 3 Lift the cover upward over the loops 4 Turn over the cover and reinstall it 110 NOTE You can install the cover with either side facing upward 5 With the cover seated in the floor pull up ward on loops and twist them one quarter turn so that they are no longer parallel to the slots in the cover 6 Flip the loops down WARNING A loose storage bin cover thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always latch the storage bin cover to the cargo load floor with the spring loaded latches when not accessing the storage bin Cargo Tie Down Hooks and Loops The tie downs located on cargo area floor should be used to secure loads safely when the vehicle is moving ae i Cargo Tie Down Loops Cargo tie down loops are located on the trim panels WARNING e Cargo tie downs are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a tie down could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the an chors provided for child seat tethers e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for pass
287. quipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable For details refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual SKY SLIDER FULL LENGTH OPEN ROOF IF EQUIPPED The Sky Slider is a full length soft top power roof that opens front to rear or rear to front Sky Slider Usage Precautions NOTE e The system will not operate when ambient temperature is at 4 F 20 C or lower e The system will not operate at vehicle speeds of 86 mph 138 km h or above e Opening and closing the Sky Slider re peatedly without the engine running may run the battery down CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the Sky Slider vehicle contents and the vehicle interior e Never attempt to open or close the Sky Slider when it is frozen Wait until the Sky Slider is thawed before operating Opening the Sky Slider when damp wet or dirty can cause stains mildew and dam age to the soft top material and the inside of your vehicle Make sure the Sky Slider is dry before opening e Always close the Sky Slider when leav ing your vehicle damage
288. r Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled 21 2 The transmission is in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is O mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doo
289. r paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or re moval of paint and decals 229 Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercar riage at least once a month Itis important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tail gate must be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the re sponsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an acci dent or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your ve hicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsi bility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemi cals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel 230 e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authori
290. r 5 Glove Compartment 8 Lower Switch Bank 3 Storage Tray 6 Climate Control 9 Storage Bin if equipped 117 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER m N x1000 B A A E3 wn IARE ENYA A E a fi a D 40 E 81d44ea3 118 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Fuel Door Reminder This symbol indicates the side of lt i the vehicle where the fuel cap is located 3 Low Fuel Warning Light This indicator lights when the fuel level drops to approximately 1 8 tank 4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked e monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom mended by the vehicle manufac turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pres sure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pres s
291. r Off al When High level heating is selected the heat ers provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is acti vated The heat output then drops to the normal High level heating If High level heating is se lected the system will automatically switch to Low level heating after approximately 30 min utes of continuous operation At that time the number of indicator lights changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the Low level heating will also turn OFF automati cally after approximately 30 minutes Press the switch once to select High level heating Press the Switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heat ing elements Off NOTE When a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medi cation alcohol use exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time e Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat
292. r child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufactur er s directions exactly when installing an in fant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic lock ing retractors which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt However any seat belt system may loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has an automatic locking retrac tor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull the belt until it is all extracted from the retractor Allow the belt to return to the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child re straint Refer to Automatic Locking Mode earlier in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tighten ing the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Discon nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Ins
293. r delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any speed User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic Automatic Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Auto Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic be overridden User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C on or off Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable User selectable to any air delivery point to any speed Automatic User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C on or off 045609172 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel 7 9 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi
294. r door LOCK switch on either front door trim panel or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock and unlock the liftgate The manual door locks on the doors and the driver s door lock cylinder will not lock and unlock the liftgate 25 WARNING Driving with the liftgate open can allow poi sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle Liftgate Flipper Glass The liftgate flipper glass is also unlocked when the liftgate is unlocked To open the flipper glass push up on the window switch located on the liftgate 022207207 Liftgate Flipper Glass Release 26 WARNING To avoid injury stand back when opening Glass may automatically rise NOTE If a malfunction to the liftgate latch should occur an emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open the liftgate The emer gency liftgate latch release can be accessed through a snap in cover located on the lift gate trim panel WARNING Driving with the flipper glass open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flipper glass closed when you are operating the vehicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions Advanced
295. r seat belts WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in EUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the loor Four Wheel Drive Models Only To enhance off road performance four wheel drive AWD models equipped with a manual transmission will start with or without pressing the clutch pedal when in 4WD LOW range The 4 LOW Indicator Light will illuminate when the transfer case is in 4WD LOW range Automatic Transmission If Equipped Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition Switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 sec onds then repeat the Normal Starting proce dure For vehicles equipped with Tip Start turn the ignition switch to the START position and re lease it as
296. r while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm acti vated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Ve hicle Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC For details refer to Illumination Approach 18 under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features in the Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual To Lock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the lock signal Flash Lights with Lock The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e For vehicles not equipped with
297. range will operate in the DRIVE position 161 Have the transmission checked at your autho rized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmis sion on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at a cali brated speed at light throttle It engages at higher speeds under heavier acceleration This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops below a cali brated speed or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages The feature is operational in OVERDRIVE and in DRIVE NOTE e The torque converter clutch will not en gage until the transmission fluid and en gine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 1 6 4 8 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it 162 may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into OVERDRIVE when cold This is normal e If the vehicle has not been driven in sev eral days the first few seconds of opera tion after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission This con dition is normal and will not cause dam age to the transmission The torque con verter will refill within five seconds of shifting from
298. re monitoring sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound However it will cause a SPARE LOW PRESSURE message to display in the EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale e Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will 188 display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing 81826bed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The sy
299. re two cupholders for the front seat passengers located in the center console Front Cupholders The rear passengers have cupholders at the rear of the center console Rear Cupholders STORAGE Front Storage Compartment The front storage compartment located on the left side of the instrument panel can hold cell phones PDAs and other small items Front Storage Compartment Console Storage Compartment To open press the latch and lift the cover Center Console The center console has a removable storage tray which can hold cell phones PDAs and other small items i Removable Storage Tray CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Load Floor The cargo load floor system has a load capac ity of 400 Ibs 181 kg The load floor has a built in storage bin that can hold a variety of items The underside of the storage bin cover also contains a plastic lined tray The cover can be installed with either side facing up for added utility To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room Refer to Seats in this Section for additional information on the 60 40 Split Fold ing Rear Seat with Fold Flat feature 109 Accessing the Storage Bin NOTE The spring loaded latches that retain the storage bin cover to the cargo load floor should not be used as cargo tie downs 1 Flip the spring loaded latch pull loo
300. reakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive mate rial to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use cau tion when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean
301. res sor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side window fogging be comes a problem increase blower speed Ve hicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the ple num they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recircu lated air within the passenger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for A C Air Filter service info
302. ressing the power door LOCK switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NOTE The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers or the driver s door lock cyl inder 3 Close all the doors The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming process If the Vehicle Security Alarm arms successfully the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the alarm is set To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plungers or the driver s door lock cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to pro tect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If the previously de scribed arming sequence has occurred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the vehicle If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door the alarm wi
303. rma tion or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to the Maintenance Schedules in Sec tion 8 of this manual for filter service intervals 145 Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the c button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between 4 and J Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the i amp button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the lt gt button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the G button to turn recirculate off If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 74 COOL OR COLD Press the GS button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between 54 and 4 then turn the air 64 Tm 6 conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn 6 Th EA the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between i a
304. rmal If the light does not turn on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 6 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL HT is part of an Onboard Diagnostic sys tem called OBD II that monitors emis sions engine and automatic trans mission control systems The light will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the light does not turn on when turning the key from LOCK or ACC to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may turn on the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and it will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Im mediate service is required WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as refer enced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others 7 High Bea
305. ro grammable on some systems To do this press the te button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully mak ing a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone Breakdown Service If Equipped f you need Breakdown service e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Breakdown service NOTE The Breakdown service number has to be setup before using To setup press the to button and say Setup Breakdown Service and follow prompts Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the uconnect phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service
306. rophone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile cellular phone uconnect phone features Bluetooth technol ogy the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone al lows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the uconnect phone at a time The uconnect phone is available in English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish languages as equipped WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the 0 microphone for the uconnect phone depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and the radio contains the two control buttons that will enable you to ac cess the uconnect phone Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The uconne
307. rrow is pointing Illuminated Vanity Mirrors An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automatically Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light um Illuminated Vanity Mirror Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped The sun visor Slide On Rod feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED NOTE For uconnect phone with Navigation or Multimedia radio refer to the Navigation or Multimedia radio s User s Manual separate booklet uconnect phone section uconnect phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect phone allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Jim Work or Dial 151 1234 5555 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s au dio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone uconnect phone allows you to transfer calls between the uconnect phone and your cellu lar phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the uconnect phone s mic
308. rs and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 22 3 Press the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small chil dren riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position 021807374 Child Protection Door Lock 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door NOTE When the child lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the out side door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a colli sion Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit wi
309. rysler do Brasil Av Alfred Jurzykowski 562 09680 900 S o Bernardo do Campo S P Tel 55 11 4173 6611 Fax 55 11 4173 9200 BULGARIA BALKAN STAR Resbarska Str 5 1510 Sofia Tel 359 2 91988 Fax 359 2 945 40 14 CHILE Comercial Chrysler S A Av Americo Vespucio 1601 Quilicura Santiago Chile Tel 56 2 620 7600 Fax 56 2 730 6201 CHINA Chrysler Group China Sales Limited 16F Gemdale Plaza Tower A No 91 Jian Guo Road Chaoyang District Beijing 100022 P R China Chrysler Brand Tel 400 650 1195 Dodge Brand Tel 400 650 0118 COLOMBIA Chrysler Colombia S A Avenida Calle 26 70A 25 Bogot Colombia Tel 57 1 4236700 Fax 57 1 410 5667 COSTA RICA AutoStar La Uruca frente al Banco Nacional San Jos Costa Rica Tel 506 295 0000 Fax 506 295 0052 CROATIA EUROLINE d o o Kovinska 5 10 000 Zagreb Tel 385 1 3441 111 Fax 385 1 3441 113 CZECH REPUBLIC Chrysler Czech Republic s r o Daimlerova 2296 2 149 45 Praha 4 Chodov Czech Republic Tel 420 0 2 71077 111 Tel 420 0 2 25101 111 Fax 420 0 2 71077 507 DENMARK Chrysler Danmark ApS Frederikskaj 4 DK 1790 K benhavn V Tel 45 0 35 256 830 Fax 45 0 35 256 832 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Reid y Compa ia John F Kennedy Casi Esq Lope de Vega Santo Domingo Dominican Republic Tel 809 562 7211 Fax 809 565 8774 269 ECUADOR Chrysler Jeep Automotriz del Ecuador Av Juan Tanca Marengo
310. s Replace the engine air filter element Replace the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Flush and replace the engine coolant antifreeze Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Replace the engine timing belt and timing belt tensioner LoocoobolocolgccOOCU Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 262 112 500 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OCOC C C O C O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tf Rotate tires Replace the engine air filter element Drain the fuel filter water separator unit Drain and refill the front and rear axle fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the transfer case fluid add if necessary Replace the accessory drive belt Inspect the manual transmission fluid add if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 263 125 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule OOC OC C O C C O Change the engine oil and engine oil filter tF Rotate tires
311. s and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its perfor mance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed con tainer Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sud den brake failure This could result in a accident e Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to con taminate the brake fluid Brake seal com ponents could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident 225 Automatic Transmission If Equipped Fluid Level Check Your vehicle is equipped with a capped trans mission oil fill tube It is sealed and should not be tampered with Your authorized dealer has t
312. s on leve ground will improve the accuracy of the oil leve readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95 L of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these engines 217 Engine Oil Selection 2 8L Diesel Engine se only Diesel Engine Oils conforming to API American Petroleum Institute Quality CJ 4 or Cl 4 For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Oil Fills use engine ils that meet the requirements of ACEA C3 O Engine Oil Viscosity 2 8L Diesel Engine For vehicles equipped with a Diesel Particulate Filter DPF 5W 30 ESP fully synthetic low ash that meets Chrysler Material Standard MS 11106 must be used For vehicles not equipped with a Diesel Par ticulate Filter DPF OW 40 ESP fully synthetic oil that meets Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 may be used Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change NOTE For best access to the oil filter a drive on hoist should be used instead of a chassis hoist 3 7L Only c o 218 Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replace ment filters varies considerably Only high qual ity filters should be used to assure most effi cient service MOPAR engine oil fil
313. se tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Continued WARNING Continued Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is ona jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be ex tremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Jack Warning Label 1 Remove spare tire 2 Remove jack and tools from mounting bracket Assemble the tools by connecting the driver to the extension and then to the lug wrench 3 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 4 Locate the jack as shown For the front tires place it rearward of the notch on the body weld seam behind wheel to be changed For the rear tires place it under the axle by the wheel to be change
314. seat belts to improve occupant pro tection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and younger should al ways ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passen ger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and d
315. seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up WARNING Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Normal Starting Diesel Engine 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Watch for the Wait To Start Light in the instrument cluster Refer to Section 4 It will illuminate for two to ten seconds or more depending on engine temperature When the Wait To Start Light goes out the engine is ready to start 3 For vehicles not equipped with Tip Start DO NOT press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it when the engine starts NOTE The starter motor may need to remain en gaged for up to 30 seconds in very cold conditions until the engine is started 4 For vehicles equipped with Tip Start DO NOT press the accelerator Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage auto matically when the engine is running 5 After the engine starts allow it to idle for approximately 30 seconds before driving This allows oil to circulate and lubricate the turbo charger Star
316. sel Engine Oils confirming to API American Petroleum Institute Quality Cl 4 with Particulate Filter or CJ 4 For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils use engine oils meeting the requirements of ACEA C3 LOW ASH and approved to MB 229 31 or MB 229 51 Engine Oil Filter 3 7L Engine MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Engine Oil Filter 2 8L Diesel Engine MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs 3 7L Engine ZFR6F 11G Gap 0 043 in 1 09 mm Fuel Selection 3 7L Engine 91 Octane Fuel Selection 2 8L Diesel Engine 50 Cetane or higher Less than 15 ppm Sulfur 239 Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission If Equipped MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Manual Transmission If Equipped MOPAR Manual Transmission Fluid meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 9224 or equivalent Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Front Axle SAE 80W 90 Multi Purpose Type GL 5 Gear Lubricant or equivalent Rear Axle SAE 75W 140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent Clutch Linkage Multipurpose Grease NLGI Grade 2 E P or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available
317. sing methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While TBE is an oxygenate made from methanol i does not have the negative effects of methanol CAUTION Use of fuel with ethanol content higher than 10 may result in engine malfunction starting and operating difficulties and materials deg radation These adverse effects could result in permanent damage to your vehicle Clean Air Gasoline Many gasolines are now being blended to contribute to cleaner air especially in those areas where air pollution levels are high These new blends provide a cleaner burning fuel and some are referred to as reformulated gaso line The manufacturer supports these efforts toward cleaner air You can help by using these blends as they become available Materials Added to Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating gasolines that contain detergents corrosion and stability additives are recommended Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy reduce emissions and maintain vehicle perfor mance Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided Many of these ma terials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredi ents These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below
318. sing the NEUTRAL selection button or while the shift attempt is in process then the NEU TRAL indicator light will flash continu ously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL button is released e The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable If the ignition switch is not in the ON position the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing e Flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in NEUTRAL and the engine RUNNING With the transfer case in NEU TRAL ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK 202 Shifting Out of NEUTRAL Perform the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 2 Reconnect the battery negative cable 3 Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi tion if it has been moved or the engine has been started 4 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine 5 Press the brake pedal 6 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 7 Use the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object to press the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL button Release the NEUTRAL but ton after the NEUTRAL indicator lig
319. solid NOTE If the transfer case is not in 4WD low range the Hill Descent Control Indicator light will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled 176 Disabling HDC 1 Press the Hill Descent button or shift the transfer case out of 4WD low range The Hill Descent Control Indicator light in the instru ment cluster will turn off Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP corrects for over steering and under steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle main tain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to deter mine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over steer or under steer Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel po sition Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel po sition ESP TCS Indicator Light The ESP TCS Indicator light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS In dicator light also flas
320. stem fault will also sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81826bd7 If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pres sure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driv ing next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a Low Pres sure message and a gra
321. t Advanced Front Airbags are designed to pro vide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions de pending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck under rides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle de celeration over time vehicle speed and dam age by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have de ployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a b
322. t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal in jury LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now available However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attach ments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle The two outboard rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accom modating LATCH compatible child seats hav ing flexible webbing mounted lower attach ments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be install
323. t speed from memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition erases the set speed from memory 96 NOTE For vehicles equipped with a manual trans mission pressing the clutch pedal will dis engage the speed control A slight increase in engine RPM before the Electronic Speed Control disengages is normal To Resume Speed If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 25 mph 40 km h for gas engines and 31 mph 50 km h for diesel engines you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever up and release RESUME ACCEL and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is con tinually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed increase for gas engines and 2 mph 3 km h for diesel engines Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h for gas engines and 6 mph 10 km h for diesel engines To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in
324. t to its proper position 1 If locked in the folded position pull the release strap toward the front of the vehicle 2 Raise the seatback and lock it into place 83 WARNING Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Recliner Adjustment The rear seatback also reclines for additiona passenger comfort Pull the release strap while sitting in the rear seat to recline the seatback Rear Seatback Release Strap 84 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver seat and side mirrors and a set of desired radio station presets The memory switch is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column The switch contains a S SET button to activate the memory save function It also contains a rocker switch labeled with the number 1 and the number 2
325. talled or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improp erly installed or damaged a noFUSE mes sage will display in the odometer display area 125 For more information on fuses and fuse loca tions refer to Fuses in Section 7 CHAngE OIL Base And Mid Line Clusters Only Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oi change indicator system The CHAngE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the nex scheduled oil change interval The engine oi change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interva may fluctuate dependent upon your persona driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message tem porarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi tion Do not start the engine 126 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when y
326. ted NOTE e The ESP BAS Warning Light comes on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition switch is turned ON the ESP System will be on even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzz ing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sound will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following a maneuver that caused the ESP activation WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be ben eficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in accident 21 SERV Service 4WD Indicator Light If Equipped The SERV 4WD Indicator Light will turn on when the ignition key is turned to the ON position and it will stay on for two seconds If the light stays on or turns on during driving it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required SERV 4WD 22 Coolant Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated en E gine condition If the light turns on Ye while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the air conditioner is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the tempera ture reading does not return to normal turn the engi
327. ter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you 64 wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All uconnect Phonebook Names e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phonebook entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the iS button during the playing of the de sired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The fol
328. ters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Sec tion 8 for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before start ing the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required WARNING e Battery acid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in your face or on your skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Continued WARNING Continued e Battery gas is fla
329. th Integrated Key To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice to unlock all doors and the liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to ac knowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors and the liftgate on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Remote Key Unlock under Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a pro grammed i e functional RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 sec 17 onds Then press and hold the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature from outside the vehicle by pressing the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE trans mitte
330. th the system en gaged move the lock plunger up un locked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK posi tion 021807374 Child Protection Door Lock 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all the door windows Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each pas senger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may re sult in serious injury or death 23 Auto Down Feature The driver s and front passenger s if equipped for passenger side power window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the win dow switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To open the window p
331. the seat belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the seat belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Dry with a soft cloth Do not remove the seat belts from the car to wash them Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly 231 FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 232 Cav Car Mini Description Cav Car Mini Description ity tridge Fuse ity tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse J1 ums J10 30Amp Headlamp Wash J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Pink Relay Pink Module if equipped Man if equipped Tuning Valve J3 30 Amp Rear Door if equipped Pink Modules J11 30 Amp Sway Bar J4 25 Amp Driver Door Node Pink if equipped Natural Thatchm Lk Ulk J5 25 Amp Passenger Door if equiped Pwr Sld Natural Node ee gt Ped S J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw Pump ESP Yellow IOD if equipped J14 40Amp EBL Rear Win J7 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Green dow Defogger Pink
332. tho rized dealer as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque con verter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages Five Speed Automatic Transmission 2 8L Diesel Engine The electronically controlled transmission pro vides a precise shift schedule The transmis sion electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shift Lever 159 Gear Ranges NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a mo ment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially im portant when the engine is cold If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to cycle the key to the LOCK position before restart ing Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after restarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the LOCK position first PARK This gear position supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking br
333. tic converter will not require maintenance However it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst opera tion and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your ve hicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat result ing in possible damage to the converter and vehicle WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such ma terials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn n unusual situations involving grossly malfunc tioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over heating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn OFF the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifi cations should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and he vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing
334. ting The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON position 92 CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off e In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the Park position before turning off the en gine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the ve hicle is restarted e Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the wind shield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desir able Rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer control lever to the first detent and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval 031507503 Front Wiper Control There are five delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles or from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds b
335. ting excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubri cated The external lock cylinders should be lubri cated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality 220 lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lu bricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de pending on geographical area and fre quency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks wa ter lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any de bris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Flu
336. ting and Operating Cautions Diesel Engine WARNING NEVER pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury e Running a cold engine at high speeds dur ing driving or idling may damage engine components Before turning off your turbo diesel en gine always allow the engine to return to normal idle speed and run for several seconds This assures proper lubrication of the turbocharger This is particularly necessary after any period of hard driv ing Turbocharger Cool Down NOTE Letting the engine idle after extended opera tion allows the turbine housing to cool to normal operating temperature The following chart should be used as a guide in determining the amount of engine idle time required to sufficiently cool down the turbo charger before shut down depending upon the type of driving and the amount of cargo 153 TURBOCHARGER COOL DOWN CHART Driving Conditions Load Turbocharger Temperature Idle Time in minutes Before Shut Down Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than 1 Stop and Go Medium Warm 1 Highway Speeds Medium Warm 2 City Traffic Max GCWR Warm 3 Highway Speeds Max GCWR Warm 4 Uphill Grade Max GCWR Hot 5 MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF CAUTION 1 3 5 EQUIPPED Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch WARNING pedal
337. tion is first turned ON 33 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on e for six to eight seconds as a bulb ry check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light does not turn on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer 34 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC Display On vehicles equipped with a Premium Cluster this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC messages when the ap propriate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this sec tion for more information On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster this display shows the compass heading N S E W NE NW SE and SW and the outside temperature 35 Water In Fuel Indicator Diesel Only n i This light indicates water has col ry a 4 lected in the fuel filter and should O be drained immediately See your authorized dealer for service 36 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the FO fog lights are on 37 Rear Fog Light Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on 127 38 Position Light Indicator This indicator will illuminate when either the parklamps or headlamps are turned on 007 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle I
338. tions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine over heating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recom mended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 of this manual for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lu brication to minimize the possibility of comp
339. to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the ve hicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function reset ALL will display dur ing this three second window Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight com pass readings and the outside temperature ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The ECO message will display below the out side temperature in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you t
340. to do so could result in an accident Towing Requirements Trailer Lights amp Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 7 pin or a 13 pin wiring harness Use a factory ap proved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector 81789d4e 7 Pin Connector Pin Function Wire Color Number 1 Left Turn Signal Yellow 2 Rear Fog Light Blue 3 Ground Common White Return 4 Right Turn Signal Green 5 Right Rear Posi Brown tion Side Marker Lights and Rear Registration Plate Illumination Device Pin Function Wire Color Pin Function Wire Color Pin Function Wire Color Number Number Number 6 Stop Lights Red 1 Left Turn Signal Yellow 10 Power Supply Red T Left Rear Position Black 2 Rear Fog Light Blue Controlled by Igni Side Marker 33 Ground Common White tion Switch 12V Lights and Rear Return for Con 11 Return for Contact White Registration Plate tacts Pins 1 and Pin 10 Illumination 2 and 4 to 8 12 Reserve for Red Blue Device 4 Right Turn Signal Green Future Allocation The rear position registration plate illu
341. trail conditions The ESP OFF button is located in the lower switch bank below the climate control To enter Full Off mode depress and hold the ESP OFF button for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds the ESP TCS Indicator light will illu minate and an ESP Off message will appear in the odometer Press and release the trip odometer button located on the instrument cluster to turn off this message n this mode ESP and TCS are turned off except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph At speeds over 40 mph the system automatically switches to Partial Off mode described above When the vehicle speed returns to less than 35 mph the ESP system will return to Full Off mode The ESP TCS Indicator light is always illuminated when ESP is off To turn ESP on again momentarily 178 depress the ESP OFF button This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE e Full Off is the only operating mode for ESP in 4WD low range Therefore ESP system will be in this mode whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD low range or the transfer case is shifted into 4WD low range e The ESP Off message will display and a chime will sound when the shift lever is moved from any position to the PARK position and then moved out of the PARK position This will o
342. ts The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Manual Seat Adjustment Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Then using body pres sure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Recliner Adjustment The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the seat Seatback Release Lever To recline the seatback lean forward slightly and lift the lever Then lean back to the position desired and release the lever To return the seatback to its normal upright position lean forward and lift the lever Release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injur
343. ture is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occu pant s chest WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly auto matic locking retractor feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions 33 Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The passen ger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers 34 81bcd6b2 1 Driver Front Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag NOTE These airbags are certified to the new regu lations for Advanced Airbags The Advanced Front Airba
344. uage Italian e Language English e Language French e Language Spanish e Tutorial e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the K t button first and wait for the beep be speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the sys tem recognizing their voice commands or num bers the uconnect voice Voice Training feature may be used 78 1 Press the amp button say System Setup and once you afe in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconnect voice For best re sults the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Manual Front Seat Adjustmen
345. ufacturer for your air conditioning system Some unap proved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs e The air conditioning system contains refrig erant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydro fluorocarbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product However the manufac turer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment 219 NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C sys tem sealers stop leak products seal condi tioners compressor oil and refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubrica
346. ure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approxi mately one minute and then remain continu ously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the re placement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
347. usly or fatally in jured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Locks A power door lock switch is located on each of the front door trim panels Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate Power Door Lock Switch Location 1 Unlock 2 Lock If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from accidentally locking your keys in the vehicle Removing the key or clos ing the door will allow the locks to operate A chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and a door is open as a reminder to remove the key Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is en abled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features unde
348. utton to release the anchorage and then move it up or down to the position that fits you best 29 NOTE The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor age is equipped with an Easy Up feature This feature allows the shoulder belt an chorage to be adjusted in the upward posi tion without pressing the release button To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position Am Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position 30 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Seat Belt Pretensioner If Equipped The front passenger seat belt may be equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of
349. ved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor e Airis directed through the floor outlets y with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Ve Air is directed through the floor defrost ey and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the wind shield Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when nec essary Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button will put the system in recir Ce culation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humid ity are present Activating recircu lation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and win dow fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommen
350. vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Children 12 years and under should ride prop erly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the right seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Seating Position or other site Mass Group Front Passenger Rear Outboard Rear Center Intermediate Outboard Intermediate Center Group up to 10 kg X U U X X Group 0 up to 13 kg X U U X X Group 9 to 18 kg X U U X X Group II 15 to 25 kg X U U X X Group III 22 to 36 kg X U U X X Key of letters used in the table above X Seat position not suitable for children in this hicle Convertible child seats often have a U Suitable for universal category restraints mass group higher weight limit in the rearward facing approved for use in this mass group UF Suitable for forward facing universal category restr
351. vehicle for 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h The TPMS will chime and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Upon the next ignition key cycle the TPMS will no longer chime or turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light To reactivate the TPMS first replace all four wheel and tire assemblies road tires with those equipped with TPM Sensors Then drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h The TPMS will chime and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following compo nents e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors 187 e Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four wheel wells e Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a tire pressu
352. vely impact vehicle performance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealership or qualified repair center e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunc tion use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure 216 Engine Oil Gasoline Engine Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil Refer to the
353. ver to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever 031507504 Mist Control The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped For details refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Program mable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center in section 4 of this manual Rain Sensing Wipers If Equipped This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver This feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield wash ers of the vehicle ahead Rotate the end of the windshield wiper washer control lever to one of the five intermittent wiper settings to activate this feature 93 The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the windshield wiper washer control lever Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive Choose position 3 for normal rain conditions Choose position 2 or 1 if you desire less wiper sensitivity Choose position 4 or 5 if you desire more sensitivity Place the lever in the off posi tion when not using the system NOTE e The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper speed is in the low or high position e The Rain
354. w user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only 70 To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Recognition VR e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period e Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions Even though the system is designed for users speaking in European English Dutch French German Italian or Spanish accents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated sys tem such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sound ing names in the uconnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Local name recognition rate is opti mized when the entries are not similar
355. whenever pos sible Engines may idle at higher speeds during warm up which could cause rear wheels to spin and result in loss of vehicle control Be especial y careful while driving on slippery roads in close quarter maneuvering park ing or s opping Do not drive too fast for road conditions especial wedge o y when roads are wet or slushy A water can build up between the tire tread and the road This hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction braking ability and control After going through deep water or a car wash brakes may become wet resulting in decreased performance and unpredictable braking action Dry the brakes by gentle intermittent pedal action while driving at very slow speeds ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly re ferred to as Electronic Stability Program ESP This system includes an Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Hill Descent Control HDC and Electronic Stability Program ESP These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining ve hicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls the hydraulic brake pres sure to prevent wheel lock u
356. witch upward to the On position to activate the rear wiper NOTE The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only Rotate the switch upward to the washer position to activate that rear washer The washer pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Mode knob Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the win dow Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating
357. ws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death 76 When you press the Tu button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a com mand NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the ih button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the amp button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Can cel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active applica tion For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press th
358. y to explode and could result in personal injury During cold weather when temperatures are below the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not at tempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode and cause per sonal injury Battery temperature must be brought above freezing point before at tempting a jump start 7 If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key mmobilizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START position 8 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few min utes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 9 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent e Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion CAUTION Any procedure other than above could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or of the immobilized vehicle 209 TOW EYES Your vehicle is equipped with tow eyes which are mounted in the front and the rear CAUTION Tow eyes are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow eyes for tow truck hookup or highway towing You cou
359. y put the system in recirculation mode ten min utes This can be used when out side conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the LED in the control button to 143 illuminate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fog ging The Recirculation mode is not al lowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clear ing Recirculation will be disabled auto matically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recir culation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow 144 Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off Most of the time when in Automatic Op eration you can temporarily put the sys tem into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain condi
360. y shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an auto matic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK other wise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING e Never use the PARK position on an auto matic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally in jured e Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle e Be sure the parking brake is fully disen gaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident Continued 169 WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in
361. y the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corre sponds to the transmission gear selected Gear Approximate HDC Set Speed 1st 1 mph 1 5 km h 2nd 3 mph 4 5 km h 3rd 4 mph 6 km h 4th 5 mph 8 km h DRIVE 7 5 mph 12 km h REVERSE 1 mph 1 5 km h NEUTRAL 3 mph 4 5 km h However the driver can override HDC opera tion by applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed Con versely if more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase ve hicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle at the original set speed NOTE HDC is available on vehicles equipped with the Selec Trac Il transfer case e The transfer case must be in 4WD low range to enable HDC e HDC is enabled only when the Hill De scent Control Indicator light in the in strument cluster is on solid e HDC will NOT activate on level ground e HDC will NOT activate at vehicle speeds above 30 mph 50 km h The Hill Descent button is located in the lower Hill Descent Button 175 Enabling HDC 1 Shift the transfer case into 4WD 4 low range Refer to Four Wheel LOW Drive Operation in this section for transfer case operation informa tion 2 Press the Hill Descent button af The Hill Descent Control Indica e tor light in the instrument cluster will turn on
362. your uconnect phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your uconnect phone The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the uconnect phone will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Ad vanced Phone Connectivity Dial by Saying a Number e Press the te button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial e The system will prompt you to say the num ber you want to call e For example you can say 151 1234 5555 e The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name e Press the to button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call 61 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the uconnect M phonebook or down loaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phon
363. zed dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or exces sive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MO PAR cleaners or equivalent are recom mended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid auto matic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the follow ing manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use afresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflectio

1 - Silberauto

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents